June 2015
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Navigator
Litho in U.S.A.
GL7J 19A321 AA
Owner’s Manual
2016 NAVIGATOR
Owner’s Manual
2016 NAVIGATOR
owner.lincoln.com lincolncanada.com
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design
or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any
form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20150508202958
Introduction
About This Manual............................................7
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65................................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Lincoln Automotive Financial
Services..........................................................11
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Special Notices.................................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment...........13
Export Unique Options...................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment..........................15
Child Safety
General Information........................................16
Installing Child Restraints..............................18
Booster Seats..................................................26
Child Restraint Positioning...........................29
Child Safety Locks..........................................30
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation...................................32
Fastening the Seatbelts................................33
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................35
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................37
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................38
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance................................................39
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation.....................................41
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................43
Side Airbags.....................................................44
Safety Canopy™...............................................45
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........47
Airbag Disposal...............................................48
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................49
Remote Control...............................................50
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................53
MyKey™
Principle of Operation...................................54
Creating a MyKey...........................................55
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56
Checking MyKey System Status.................58
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems........................................................59
MyKey Troubleshooting................................60
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................63
Power Liftgate.................................................66
Keyless Entry....................................................70
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System............................73
Anti-Theft Alarm..............................................74
Power Running Boards
Using Power Running Boards......................75
1
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel......................77
Audio Control...................................................78
Voice Control....................................................81
Cruise Control.................................................82
Information Display Control.........................82
Heated Steering Wheel................................82
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals......................................83
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers..........................................84
Autowipers.......................................................84
Windshield Washers......................................85
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............85
Lighting
General Information.......................................87
Lighting Control...............................................87
Autolamps.........................................................88
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................89
Daytime Running Lamps...............................89
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................90
Direction Indicators.........................................91
Welcome Lighting............................................91
Interior Lamps...................................................91
Ambient Lighting............................................92
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..............................................93
Exterior Mirrors................................................94
Interior Mirror...................................................95
Childminder Mirror.........................................95
Rear Quarter Windows..................................96
Sun Visors.........................................................96
Moonroof...........................................................97
Instrument Cluster
Gauges..............................................................99
Warning Lamps and Indicators...................101
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............104
Information Displays
General Information.....................................105
Information Messages....................................111
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control.........................125
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................127
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............129
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................130
Remote Start...................................................130
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position....................132
Head Restraints.............................................132
Power Seats....................................................134
Memory Function..........................................135
Rear Seats.......................................................137
Heated Seats..................................................144
Climate Controlled Seats............................145
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener................148
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.................................153
2
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Storage Compartments
Center Console.............................................155
Overhead Console.......................................155
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information......................................156
Keyless Starting.............................................156
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................157
Engine Block Heater....................................160
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions........................................162
Fuel Quality.....................................................163
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................164
Running Out of Fuel.....................................164
Refueling.........................................................165
Fuel Consumption.........................................167
Emission Control System............................168
Transmission
Automatic Transmission................................171
Four-Wheel Drive
Using Four-Wheel Drive..............................176
Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential................................183
Brakes
General Information......................................184
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..........................................................184
Parking Brake.................................................185
Hill Start Assist...............................................185
Traction Control
Principle of Operation..................................187
Using Traction Control.................................187
Stability Control
Principle of Operation..................................189
Using Stability Control.................................190
Terrain Response
Using Hill Descent Control.........................193
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation..................................195
Rear Parking Aid............................................196
Front Parking Aid..........................................196
Rear View Camera........................................197
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................200
Using Cruise Control...................................200
Driving Aids
Blind Spot Information System.................202
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................204
Steering..........................................................208
Drive Control.................................................209
Self-Leveling Suspension.............................211
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage...........................212
Roof Racks and Load Carriers...................213
Load Limit........................................................214
3
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................222
Trailer Sway Control....................................223
Recommended Towing Weights..............223
Essential Towing Checks...........................226
Towing Points................................................232
Transporting the Vehicle............................233
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........234
Driving Hints
Breaking-In.....................................................235
Reduced Engine Performance..................235
Economical Driving......................................235
Driving Through Water...............................236
Floor Mats......................................................236
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................238
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................239
Fuel Shutoff...................................................239
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................240
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need................243
In California (U.S. Only)...............................244
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................245
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)...........................................246
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.......................................................246
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................248
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......248
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)............................................................249
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart............................250
Changing a Fuse..........................................263
Maintenance
General Information.....................................264
Opening and Closing the Hood...............264
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................266
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................268
Engine Oil Check.........................................268
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................269
Engine Coolant Check................................269
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check......274
Transfer Case Fluid Check.........................274
Brake Fluid Check........................................274
Washer Fluid Check.....................................275
Fuel Filter........................................................276
Changing the 12V Battery..........................276
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................278
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................278
Adjusting the Headlamps...........................279
Changing a Bulb...........................................280
Bulb Specification Chart.............................282
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................284
Vehicle Care
General Information.....................................286
Cleaning Products.......................................286
Cleaning the Exterior..................................286
Waxing.............................................................287
Cleaning the Engine....................................288
4
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades.........................................................288
Cleaning the Interior...................................289
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens..........................291
Cleaning Leather Seats...............................291
Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................292
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................292
Vehicle Storage............................................293
Wheels and Tires
General Information....................................295
Tire Care.........................................................298
Using Snow Chains.......................................312
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..............313
Changing a Road Wheel............................320
Technical Specifications.............................326
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications..................................328
Motorcraft Parts............................................329
Vehicle Identification Number..................330
Vehicle Certification Label.........................330
Transmission Code Designation................331
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................332
Audio System
General Information.....................................340
Audio Unit........................................................341
Satellite Radio...............................................344
Media Hub......................................................347
Accessories
Accessories....................................................348
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................350
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information...........353
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..............357
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................361
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............365
Appendices
End User License Agreement...................385
5
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
6
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to your
vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so may appear different to you on
your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
7
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten seatbelt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
8
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company, Ford of
Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle
diagnostic information received through a
direct connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
9
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company, Ford
of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for
vehicle improvement purposes. For U.S. only
(if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that
certain diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic information
may be used for any purpose.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford
of Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
10
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or personal
information about the occupants to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology
and advanced vehicle sensors to collect
the vehicle’s current location, travel
direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches that you request. If you do not
want Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the service. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine exhaust,
certain vehicle components, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, safety belt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
11
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Use the options below to contact us with
questions about your account or financing
and we will respond promptly:
Web Address
www.LincolnAFS.com
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
P.O. Box 542000
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’ s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate these parts deliver the intended
level of protection as a whole system. A great
way to know for sure you are getting this
level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Lincoln Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Lincoln Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Lincoln Warranty.
12
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not follow
the instruction highlighted by the warning
symbol. Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could result in
personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
system has a data port for diagnostics, repair
and reprogramming services with diagnostic
scan tools. Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use
of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty may
not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in
device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
13
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for Export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
15
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is secured
properly in a device that is appropriate
for their height, age and weight. Child safety
restraints must be bought separately from
your vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
WARNINGS
All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints
are based on probable child height, age and
weight thresholds from National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed in
your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check
with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of
WARNINGS
transportation, locate your local St. John
Ambulance office by searching for St. John
Ambulance on the internet, or Transport
Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of
people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries,
including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
16
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seat back upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
17
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80
pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position.
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
18
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child seat and
the release button, to prevent accidental
unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child seat with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a
forward facing child seat, the steps are the
same for installing a rear facing child seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
19
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E206121
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of
20
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will help to remove remaining
slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no more
than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a
Certified Passenger Seat Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING
Never attach two child safety seats to
the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may
break, causing serious injury or death.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the vehicle seatback and seat
cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one
top tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use safety belts to
attach the child seat, however the safety belt
can still be used to attach the child seat if
the lower anchors are not used. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child seat. We
recommend the use of a child safety seat
having a top tether strap. See Using Tether
Straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating positions
marked with the child seat symbol.
21
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E205021
E206122
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the cushion
and seatback, below the locator symbols on
the seatback. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to properly install
a child seat with LATCH attachments.
E144054
The locator symbols are on round plastic
buttons for the center seat and on
rectangular tags for the outboard seats.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
seat only to the anchors shown.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that
the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child seat from side to side and forward
and back where it is secured to the vehicle.
The seat should move less than one inch
when you do this for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety
belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be
attached first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward,
if included with the child seat.
22
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat
for information about ordering a tether strap,
or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the
appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
Some of the rear seats of your vehicle are
equipped with built-in tether strap anchors
located behind the seats as described below.
In the third row center seating position, the
tether anchor is a loop at the bottom of the
seatback.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view).
Second row bench seat
E205023
Second row bucket seats
E205024
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the correct
tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed
using either the safety belt, the lower
anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you
can attach the top tether strap.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH
attachments, do not tighten the tether strap
enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle
seat cushion when the child is seated in it.
Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting
the front of the child seat. Keeping the child
seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the
best protection in a severe crash.
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
23
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Second row outboard seating positions
E205025
Second row center seating position (if
equipped)
E205026
1. For center seating positions, route the
child safety seat tether strap over the
back of the seat. For outboard seating
positions, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head
restraint posts. If the top of the safety
seat hits the head restraint, recline the
seat back slightly to obtain proper fit.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
E205027
3. Grasp the tether strap and position it to
the seat frame.
E205028
4. Rotate the tether strap, and clip the tether
strap to the anchor on the seat frame.
E205029
5. Rotate the tether strap clip.
24
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Third row center seating position
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat.
E205030
2. Locate the anchor webbing loop for the
seating position. You may need to pull
back the top of the hinged panel along
the bottom of the seatback to access the
tether anchor.
E205032
3. Clip the tether strap through the anchor
loop as shown. If the tether strap is
clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat
may not be retained properly in the event
of a crash.
E205033
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. If the safety seat is not
anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with
a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
25
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80
pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100
pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
26
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat back
or no head restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child's head (as measured at
the tops of the ears) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a higher seat
back or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
27
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
28
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear
seating position. If all children cannot be
seated and restrained properly in a rear
seating position, properly restrain the largest
child in the front seat.
WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the instructions
and warnings provided by the
manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly
installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your
child's height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result
in serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Never use pillows, books, or towels to
boost a child. They can slide around
and increase the likelihood of injury or death
in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
29
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined weight of
child and child seat
Restraint Type
Safety belt onlySafety belt and
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
Safety belt and top
tether anchor
LATCH (lower
anchors only)
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against
the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It
may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 132).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
30
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E205034
The locks are located on the rear edge of
each rear door and must be set separately
for each door.
Move the lock control up to engage the lock.
Move it down to disengage the lock.
31
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure
children sit where they can be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result
in serious injury or death.
All occupants of the vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety
belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a
pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt
under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt
around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one
person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years old
and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. Failure
to follow this could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum protection in
an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap
and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of
the vehicle should always properly wear their
safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety belt).
32
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Safety belt warning light and chime.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten the
safety belts when activated. In frontal and
near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. In side crashes and
rollovers, the pretensioners will be activated
when the Safety Canopy is activated.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned
low across the hips. The shoulder portion of
the safety belt should be positioned across
the chest. Pregnant women should also
follow this practice. See the following figure.
33
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should be
positioned low across the hips below the
belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow.
The shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety belt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking
retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all safety
belts should be checked for proper function.
The belt and retractor assembly must
be replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or any
other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized
dealer. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of locking
mode. The front outboard passenger and
rear seat safety belts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination safety belts will lock to help
reduce forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this
occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull
webbing out again in a slow and controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
34
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed in
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See Child Safety (page
16).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, a safety belt extension assembly
can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is on a label
located either at the end of the webbing or
on the retractor behind the trim. Also, use
the safety belt extension only if the safety
belt is too short for you when fully extended.
SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height adjuster
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt and increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
35
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
E205035
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the side release buttons and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the buttons and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
Second Row Comfort Guide
WARNING
Position the safety belt comfort guide
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt and increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
E205036
The second row outboard lap and shoulder
belt is equipped with a belt comfort guide.
This guide is attached to the quarter trim
panel. Use it to adjust the comfort of the
shoulder belt for smaller occupants in the
outboard second row seats.
E205037
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the belt guide
(the portion of the belt between the latch
tongue and the D-ring, not the portion
where the belt exits from the quarter trim
panel).
2. Slide the guide up or down along the
webbing so that the belt is centered on
the occupant’s shoulder.
36
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND
INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning
chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is
turned to the on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
37
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat and a safety
belt is unbuckled.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You buckle your safety belt before you switch the ignition on or less
than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you buckle your safety belt.
You do not buckle your safety belt before your vehicle reaches at
least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the
ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you buckle your safety belt.
The driver safety belt is unbuckled for about 1 minute while the vehicle
is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
38
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system activated
for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• All vehicle doors are closed.
• The driver safety belt is unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 60 seconds.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off if it is
currently on.
• This will switch the feature on if it is
currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT
MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts
to make sure there are no nicks, tears or
cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety
belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat back (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions for
additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
39
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However, if
the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a crash should
also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 286).
40
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently,
and the risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Always transport children 12 years old
and under in the back seat and always
properly use appropriate child restraints.
Failure to follow this could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you could
be seriously injured or killed. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components get
hot after inflation. To avoid risk of
injury, do not touch them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
41
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
Restraint Safety System
The restraint safety system provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle restraint safety system consists
of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt
usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensor(s), safety belt pretensioners, front
safety belt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the restraint safety system work?
The restraint safety system can adapt the
deployment strategy of your vehicle’ s safety
devices according to crash severity and
occupant conditions. A collection of crash
and occupant sensors provides information
to the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or
either one or both stages of the dual-stage
airbag supplemental restraints based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
42
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation
area may cause those objects to be
propelled by the airbag into your face and
torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and passenger front airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 47).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration recommends a minimum
distance of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. Properly
seated occupants sit upright, lean against
the seat back, and center themselves on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably
extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can
43
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
increase the chance of injury in a crash
event. For example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet
up, the chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag cover,
on the side of the seatbacks (of the front
seats), or in front seat areas that may come
into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The
use of accessory seat covers may
prevent the deployment of the side airbags
and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat
cover on a seat containing an airbag as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
44
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The side
airbag system (including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard
side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the
side affected by the crash will be inflated.
The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants
in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are found on
your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the seatback
of the driver and front passenger seats.
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 47).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner at
the siderail that may come into contact with
a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
curtain airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the headliner.
45
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on
a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle including
the driver should always wear their
safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain
airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct
or place objects in the deployment
path of the curtain airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including the A,
B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by
the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is
mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front and
rear side windows identified by a label
or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 47).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
46
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to the
front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body structure and
tow hooks) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module which
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the
Safety Canopy®. Based on the type of crash
(frontal impact, side impact or rollover), the
restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. See Instrument Cluster
(page 99). Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
47
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or
front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to inflate
in certain side impact crashes. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. The Safety Canopy may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
48
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of the
following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones, battery
chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be able
to use your remote control. You can lock and
unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You press any button on the keyless
entry keypad within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of
an intelligent access key.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 50).
49
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
E138616
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E142431
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle. Slide the release on the
back of the remote control to release the key
blade, then pull the blade out.
E138618
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
1. Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
E142432
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover. Do not use the key
blade to remove the cover or you could
damage it.
50
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E138622
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto
the transmitter and install the key blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
The horn sounds and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using the
panic alarm.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or if
the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn will
sound twice and the direction indicators will
not flash.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from the outside. The transmitter has an
extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can
be configured to operate when the vehicle
is remote started. See Automatic Climate
Control (page 125).
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start
systems.
The remote start system does not work if any
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch off the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The service engine soon indicator was
on the last time your vehicle was driven.
51
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To start your vehicle remotely:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 105).
Note: You must press the push button
ignition switch on the instrument panel once
while applying the brake pedal before
driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and the vehicle
runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes, depending on
the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
the duration is set to 10 minutes, the duration
extends by another 10 minutes. For example,
if your vehicle had been running from the
first remote start for 5 minutes, your vehicle
continues to run now for a total of 20
minutes. You can extend the remote start
up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
to remotely switch off your vehicle after
remote starting. This is due to the added
noise of your running vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 105).
52
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the intelligent access key to
recall memory settings for the driver seat,
power mirrors, power steering column and
power adjustable foot pedals. Unlock your
vehicle with the intelligent access key to
recall the memory positions. You can
program the intelligent access key to recall
memory positions. See Memory Function
(page 135).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 73).
53
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be activated
with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder. You
cannot disable this feature. The audio
system will mute when the front seat
occupants’ safety belts are not fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your
vehicle, are forced on: parking aid, blind
spot information system (BLIS) with cross
traffic alert, lane departure warning and
forward collision warning system.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions
(available only in some markets).
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure certain
MyKey settings when you first create a
MyKey and before you recycle the key or
restart the vehicle. You can also change the
settings afterward with an admin key:
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit
to a limit that will prevent the driver
from maintaining a safe speed considering
posted speed limits and prevailing road
conditions. The driver is always responsible
to drive in accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could
result in accident or injury.
54
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%.
A message will be shown in the display
when you attempt to exceed the limited
volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or
compensated automatic volume control
will be disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is selected,
you will not be able to turn off Advance
Trac or traction control, 911 Assist or
Emergency Assistance, or Do Not Disturb
(if your vehicle is equipped with these
features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped
with a push-button start, place the remote
control into the backup slot. The location
of your backup slot is in another chapter.
See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
157).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to
get to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings.
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or remote control.
55
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
2. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to
get to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey settings
using the information display control on the
steering wheel. See Information Displays
(page 105).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key or
remote control.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.Clear MyKey
56
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Action and DescriptionMessage
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.
57
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 105).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance
is by using an admin key to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected,
then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many
MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine
how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has
been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
58
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
Vehicles With Ford-Approved
Aftermarket Remote Start Systems
When using a Ford-approved aftermarket
remote start system, the vehicle recognizes
the remote start system transmitter as an
additional admin key. It is the vehicle’s
default setting.
When you start your vehicle with a
Ford-approved aftermarket remote start
system transmitter, the system shuts the
vehicle off after you open the door or shift
your vehicle into gear. This is intentional.
When you restart your vehicle, it reads the
vehicle key fob status instead of the remote
start system transmitter status.
With a Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start system, it is possible to program all key
fobs as MyKeys unintentionally. If this
happens, then the remote start system
transmitter is the admin key. If you want to
have only one key fob as a MyKey, or do not
want to have any MyKeys, then you need to
use your remote start system transmitter to
clear all MyKeys. In that case, follow these
steps:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Start your vehicle using your remote start
system transmitter.
3. See Clearing All MyKeys (page 56).
Follow Steps 1-3.
After clearing your MyKeys, you can create
a new MyKey. See Creating a MyKey (page
55).
Note: With push-button start, you cannot
program the remote start system transmitter
as a MyKey. Always treat the remote start
system transmitter as you would any other
admin key.
Vehicles With Non-Ford-Approved
Aftermarket Remote Start Systems
MyKey is not compatible with
non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.
The following information may help if you
choose to install a non-Ford-approved
remote start system. The actions provided
below do not make MyKey compatible with
non-Ford-approved remote start systems,
but may help you retain some MyKey
functions.
When using a non-Ford-approved remote
start system, the vehicle may recognize the
remote start system as an additional admin
key with its associated privileges. If you
restart the vehicle by powering it off and
waiting a few seconds, and then powering
the vehicle back on, you may retain some
MyKey functions. This action forces your
vehicle to read the vehicle key fob instead
of the remote start system transmitter and
then uses the MyKey associated privileges.
59
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Note: The MyKey system status menu
display may include the remote start system
as an additional key in the total count of
programmed keys. See Checking MyKey
System Status (page 58).
With a non-Ford-approved aftermarket
remote start system, it is possible to program
all key vehicle key fobs as MyKeys
unintentionally. If this happens, then the
remote start system transmitter is the admin
key. If you want to have only one vehicle key
fob as a MyKey, or do not want to have any
MyKeys, then you need to use your remote
start system transmitter to clear all MyKeys.
In that case, follow these steps:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Start your vehicle using your
non-Ford-approved remote start system
transmitter.
3. See Clearing All MyKeys (page 56).
Follow Steps 1-3.
After clearing your MyKeys, you can create
a new MyKey. See Creating a MyKey (page
55).
Note: With push-button start, you cannot
program the remote start system transmitter
as a MyKey. Always treat the remote start
system transmitter as you would any other
admin key.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
The transmitter used to start the vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot create a MyKey.
The transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key. There always has to be at least one
admin key.
The transmitter is not in its backup position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 157).
The passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
60
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
The vehicle has been started using a remote start system transmitter that is not an admin key. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 59).
The transmitter used to start your vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot program the configurable
settings. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 55).
The vehicle has been started using a remote start system transmitter that is not an admin key. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 59).
The transmitter used to start your vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot clear the MyKeys.
There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 55).
The vehicle has been started using a remote start system transmitter that is not an admin key. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 59).
Purchase a new transmitter from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
Program a spare transmitter. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 73).I lost a key.
The vehicle has a remote start system transmitter that is recognized as an admin key. Clear all
MyKeys by using the remote start transmitter. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page
59).
I accidentally programmed all keys as
MyKeys.
The vehicle's system does not recognize any programmed MyKeys. See Creating a MyKey (page
55).
An unknown transmitter has been created as a MyKey.MyKey total includes one additional
key. The vehicle has a remote start system. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 59).
An unknown transmitter has been programmed to the vehicle as an admin key.Admin key total includes one additional
key.
61
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
The vehicle has a remote start system. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 59).
The MyKey is not being used by the intended user.The MyKey distance does not accumu-
late. The MyKeys have been cleared and the MyKey system has been reset.
An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.No MyKey functions with the trans-
mitter. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 55).
62
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or
the remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
A B
E163049
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Door Lock Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch no longer
operates after 20 seconds. You must unlock
your vehicle with the remote control or
keyless keypad, or switch the ignition on, to
restore function to these switches. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display. See Information Displays (page 105).
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock
and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks
the door and the second pull opens the door.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time.
The liftgate release button only operates
when your vehicle's speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three seconds
to unlock all doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators flash twice to indicate a change
to the unlocking mode. Driver door unlock
mode only unlocks the driver door when you
press the unlock button once. All door unlock
mode unlocks all doors when you press the
unlock button once. The unlocking mode
applies to the remote control, keyless entry
keypad and intelligent access. You can also
change between the unlocking modes using
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 105).
Reprogramming the Unlocking Function
Note: When you press the unlock button,
either all the doors are unlocked or only the
driver door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock
button again unlocks all the doors.
63
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
on the remote control simultaneously for at
least four seconds with the ignition off. The
direction indicators flash twice to confirm the
change.
To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all doors.
The direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors will lock again, the horn will sound and
the direction indicators will flash if all the
doors and the liftgate are closed.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
alarm or remote start, the horn sounds twice
and the direction indicators do not flash. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 105).
Opening the Liftgate
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the liftgate.
Activating Intelligent Access
The intelligent access key must be within 3 ft
(1 m) of the driver door or liftgate.
At a Door
You can use the keyless entry keypad to lock
and unlock the doors. See Keyless Entry
(page 70).
At the Liftgate
The liftgate unlocks and opens automatically
when you press the liftgate release button.
See Power Liftgate (page 66).
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key inside
your vehicle after you close the last door. If
the system finds a key, all of the doors will
immediately unlock and the horn will sound
twice, indicating that a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
64
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
To do this, lock your vehicle after you have
closed all the doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Auto Relock
If you press the unlock button on the remote
control and do not open a door within 45
seconds, your vehicle will lock and the alarm
will arm. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See Information
Displays (page 105).
Autolock
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle's speed is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle's speed is
less than 9 mph (15 km/h).
• Your vehicle's speed is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
Enabling or Disabling
To enable or disable the autolock feature,
contact an authorized dealer.
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all of
the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You stop your vehicle and switch the
ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 105).
65
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when you unlock the doors with
the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when all doors are closed and you
switch the ignition off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You press the push button ignition
switch.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on, it shuts
off when it detects a certain amount of
battery drain, or after 45 minutes.
POWER LIFTGATE
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Make sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using
a safety belt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNINGS
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you
must drive with the liftgate open, keep the
vents or windows open so outside air comes
into your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
Keep keys out of reach of children. Do
not allow children to operate or play
near an open or moving power liftgate. You
should supervise the operation of the power
liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
66
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. If there is a problem
with the open or close request, one of the
following may occur:
• One chime sounds if the ignition is on
and the transmission is not in park (P).
• Three chimes sound if the battery voltage
is below the minimum operating voltage.
• One chime sounds if the vehicle speed
is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully
opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible
gas strut failure. A repetitive tone sounds
and the liftgate closes under control. Remove
any excessive weight from the liftgate. If the
liftgate continues to close after opening,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
From the Instrument Panel
Press the button on the instrument
panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. If
an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
67
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
E209083
A
B
2. Press button A.
Note: Allow the system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
turn on obstacle detection and stop the
power operation or reverse its direction.
Manually interfering with the liftgate motion
may also replicate a gas strut failure.
Opening the Liftgate Window
E209083
A
B
1. Press button B.
2. Pull the liftgate glass upward.
68
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
E209084
Press and release the button in the rear
cargo area.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
You can stop the liftgate movement by doing
any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the remote
control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Activating the obstacle detection feature.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Three chimes sound and the
system reverses to open. Once you remove
the obstacle, you can power close the
liftgate.
69
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate
is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce
and activate obstacle detection. To prevent
this, let the power liftgate close completely
before you enter your vehicle. Before driving
off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate
or door ajar message or warning indicator.
Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the liftgate open
while driving.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound.
Remove the obstacle to operate the liftgate.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E163050
You can use the keypad to lock or unlock
the doors without using a key.
For vehicles without intelligent access, you
can operate the keypad with the factory-set
5-digit entry code. The code is located on
the owner’ s wallet card in the glove box and
is available from an authorized dealer. You
can also create up to five of your own 5-digit
personal entry codes.
For vehicles with intelligent access, you do
not need to enter a 5-digit entry code. Press
any button on keyless entry keypad once to
unlock all doors.
Note: You must have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• press 5·6 to save personal code 3
• press 7·8 to save personal code 4
• press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal entry code
through the information display.
70
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if you
have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions (If Equipped)
The programmed entry codes will recall
driver memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 will recall driver 2 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 3, 4 and 5 will
not recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
All personal codes will erase and only the
factory-set 5-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times (35
consecutive button presses). This mode
disables the keypad for one minute and the
keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the remote
control
• switching the ignition on.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You will need to have two
programmed passive anti-theft keys for this
procedure.
To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
1. Insert a key into the ignition and switch
the ignition on for a few seconds.
2. Switch the ignition off and remove the
key.
3. Insert the second key into the ignition
and switch the ignition on.
The factory-set code will display for a few
seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
Vehicles Without Intelligent Access
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The
interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking mode. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 63).
71
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time
(with the driver door closed). You do not
need to enter the keypad code first.
Vehicles With Intelligent Access
Press any button on keyless entry keypad
once to unlock all doors.
Note: You must have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
72
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or
a second coded key on the same key chain
may cause vehicle starting problems if they
are too close to the key when starting the
engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine.
Switch the ignition off, move all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and
restart the engine if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock™
The system is an engine immobilization
system. The intended design is to help
prevent the engine from starting unless a
coded key programmed to your vehicle is
used. Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may appear
in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
If you switch the ignition on with a coded key
you disarm the vehicle. If you unlock the
doors with the touch handle you disarm the
alarm.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two
intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or
stolen and you do not have an extra coded
key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. You need to
erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your vehicle.
73
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Security
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if
any door, the luggage compartment or the
hood is opened without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your
vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
74
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Security
USING POWER RUNNING BOARDS
WARNINGS
In extreme climates, excessive ice
buildup may occur, causing the running
boards not to deploy. Make sure that the
running boards have deployed, and have
finished moving before attempting to step
on them. The running boards will resume
normal function once the blockage is
cleared.
Turn off the running boards before
jacking or placing any object under
your vehicle. Never place your hand between
the extended running board and your
vehicle. A moving running board may cause
injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate more
slowly in cool temperatures.
Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Automatic Power Deploy
E166682
The running boards automatically extend
down and out when you open the door. This
can help you enter and exit your vehicle.
Automatic Power Stow
When you close the doors, the running
boards return to the stowed position after a
two-second delay.
Manual Power Deploy
You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display. See
General Information (page 105).
Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enabling and Disabling
You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display. See General Information (page 105).
75
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Power Running Boards
• When disabled (OFF), the running boards
move to the stowed position regardless
of the door position.
• When enabled (AUTO), the running
boards move back to the correct
positions based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction and
move to the end of travel if it encounters an
object while moving.
76
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Power Running Boards
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 132).
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the
control.
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the
motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
The steering column may begin to move
again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for an
additional few seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position is set. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
will stop just short of the end of the column
position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 135).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
column will move to allow extra room to exit
your vehicle. The column will return to the
previous setting when you switch the ignition
on. You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 105).
77
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
AUDIO CONTROL
Operate the following functions with the
control:
78
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type One
E205755
Volume up.A
B Seek up or next.
Seek down or previous.C
Volume down.D
79
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E205756
Volume up.A
B Seek up or next.
Media.C
Seek down or previous.D
Volume down.E
Media
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio sources.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
80
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
VOICE CONTROL
Type One
E205757
Phone mode.A
Voice recognition.B
81
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E205758
Phone mode.A
B Voice recognition.
CRUISE CONTROL
E205805
See Cruise Control (page 200).
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
E205806
See Information Displays (page 105).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If Equipped)
See your MyLincoln Touch information.
82
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the controls while your feet
are on the accelerator and brake
pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 135).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
83
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Pedals
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper
Blades (page 278).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
E205527
Rotate the end of the control:
• Away from you to increase the wiper
speed.
• Toward you to decrease the wiper speed.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper
Blades (page 278).
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing. In these conditions, you can do
the following to help keep your windshield
clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor,
located in the area around the interior mirror.
The rain sensor monitors the amount of
moisture on the windshield and automatically
turns on the wipers. It adjusts the wiper
speed by the amount of moisture that the
sensor detects on the windshield.
Note: This autowiper feature is automatically
set to on and remains on until you switch it
off in the information display. You can also
switch the feature back on at any time. See
General Information (page 105).
84
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor. Set the control to low
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on when
the rain sensor detects a large amount of
moisture on the windshield. Set the control
to high sensitivity, and the wipers will turn
on when the rain sensor detects a small
amount of moisture on the windshield.
Note: When you set the wiper system to
intermittent wipe and the autowiper system
is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting adjusts
the wiper speed according to the moisture
on the windshield only. Use the wiper lever
to wipe the windshield on-demand.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause
the washer pump to overheat.
E205528
Press the end of the wiper lever to activate
the washer:
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers
to swipe the windshield three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold activates the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You can
switch this feature on and off through the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 105).
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch off the wiper
system before using an automatic car wash.
85
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
E205529
Rotate the control to select:
Intermittent operation - the
shortest pause between wipes.
2
Intermittent operation - the longest
pause between wipes.
1
Off.0
Rear Window Washer
E205529
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to activate the rear washer.
The control returns to the 2 or 0 position
when you release it.
86
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate
normal changes in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E173257
A
Off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
87
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch the
high beam on.
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high beam
off.
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Slightly pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime fog.
Make sure the headlamps are switched to
auto or on, as appropriate, during all low
visibility conditions. Failure to do so may
result in a crash.
E173258
A
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps automatically turn
on in low light situations or when the wipers
activate.
If equipped, the following also activate when
the lighting control is in the autolamps
position and you switch them on in the
information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
88
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use the
information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on. See Information Displays (page 105).
Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps
position, you cannot switch the high beam
headlamps on until the autolamps system
turns the low beam headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after you
switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
E163270
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable lit
components in the vehicle during headlamp
and parking lamp operation.
• Tap the top or bottom of the control to
brighten/dim all interior lit components
incrementally, or
• Press and hold at the first position the
top or bottom of the control until the
desired lighting level is reached.
• Press and hold the top of the control to
the full on position to activate the “dome
on” feature. This will turn on the interior
courtesy lights. The lights will remain on
until the bottom of the control is pressed.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting during
low visibility driving conditions. Also, the
autolamps switch position may not activate
the headlamps in all low visibility conditions,
such as daytime fog. Make sure the
headlamps are switched to auto or on, as
appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
89
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type 2 - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or off
using the information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 105).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
105).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily override
autolamp control.
When switched off in the information display,
the daytime running lamps are off in all
lighting control switch positions.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS
The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This provides
more visibility when driving around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps.
B. With adaptive headlamps.
E161714
B
A
The system only works with the lighting
control in the autolamp position.
90
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Note: There is a delay of two to five seconds
before the system operates when you drive
your vehicle.
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system has a power-up movement check
feature. When your start your vehicle, the
lamps track left to right, then back to center
to alert the driver that the system is working
properly.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
• To operate the left-hand direction
indicator, push the lever down until it
stops.
• To operate the right-hand direction
indicator, push the lever up until it stops.
• To manually cancel direction indicator
operation, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and release. The direction
indicator will flash three times and stop.
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and hold. The direction
indicator will flash for as long as you hold
the lever in this position.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The Lincoln welcome mat projection lights
are on the bottom of the exterior mirror
housings. They will project an image onto
the ground a short distance from your vehicle
when welcome lighting or lighted entry turns
on.
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up or
other types of contamination on the surface
of the light lens can cause non-permanent
distortion or reduced brightness of the
image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front Map Lamps (If equipped)
The map lamps are located on the overhead
console. Press the controls on either side of
each map lamp to turn on the lamps. The
map lamps also light when:
91
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer switch is
pressed up until the courtesy lamps come
on.
• any of the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.
E163273
Rear Dome and Map Lamps
E163274
Your vehicle may have map lamps within the
rear dome lamp. Press the switches on either
side of the dome lamp to turn the lamps on.
AMBIENT LIGHTING
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.
92
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may seriously
injure themselves.
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E163056
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse if
it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury
or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
Window Lock
E163057
A
B
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls.
93
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Accessory Delay
The window switches remain operational for
several minutes when you switch the ignition
off or until you open either front door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E163059
B
A
C
Left-hand mirror.A
Off.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you
want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position
to lock the mirrors in place.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Power-Folding Mirrors
E163060
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
control down during full travel, may disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the system
to reset and for function to return to normal.
Pull the control back to fold the mirrors in or
out.
Loose Mirror
If you manually fold your power-folding
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to reset
them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
94
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise
as you reset the power-folding mirrors. This
sound is normal. Repeat this process as
needed each time you manually fold the
mirrors.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
130).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 135).
Auto-Dimming Feature
The driver exterior mirror automatically dims
with the auto-dimming interior mirror.
Signal Indicator Mirrors
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.
Blind Spot Monitor
See Blind Spot Information System (page
202).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger
or raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
CHILDMINDER MIRROR
On double bin overhead consoles, the
conversation mirror allows the driver to view
the rear seating area.
WARNING
Do not use the childminder mirror to
view rearward traffic, do not allow rear
passengers to distract you from the driving
task, and make sure the rear view mirror has
a clear view of rearward traffic. Failure to do
so could increase the risk of a crash from an
unseen vehicle, which may result in serious
injury.
95
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E205354
Press the release area on the rear edge of
the bin door to open the childminder mirror.
The door will open to full open position.
The rear view mirror may have to be adjusted
to its lower arm position to prevent
interference when the childminder mirror is
extended down.
REAR QUARTER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may seriously
injure themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E205283
Press and hold the VENT control to open the
rear quarter windows.
Pull and hold the VENT control to close the
rear quarter windows.
Note: Vehicles without a moonroof will only
have the VENT control.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
96
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended in
the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the roof
opening.
You can manually open or close the sliding
shade when the moonroof is closed. Pull the
shade toward the front of your vehicle to
close it.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E163063
Press and release the SLIDE control to open
the moonroof. The moonroof will stop short
of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.
97
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically while
closing. It will reverse some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event to override
this function. While bounce-back is active,
the closing force increases for each of the
next three times that you close the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT control
to close the moonroof.
98
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E205350
99
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Left Information Display.A
Speedometer.B
Right Information Display.C
Left Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated distance
your vehicle has traveled.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 105).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 105).
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when
your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge
indicates approximately how much fuel
remains in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent
to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.
The needle should move toward F when you
refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E
after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle
needs service soon.
After refueling, the needle may not always
return to the exact same position. This is
normal.
Note: It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station. This
is normal and depends upon the slope of
pavement at the gas station.
Note: The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the gauge
indicated. This is normal and depends upon
the slope of pavement at the gas station.
Note: If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different gas
pump nozzle.
Note: There is a small reserve left in the tank
when the fuel gauge reaches empty.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low reminder displays when the distance
to empty reaches 50 miles (80 km) to empty.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
100
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You continue to have
the normal braking system (without ABS)
unless the brake warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Brake System
E144522
It illuminates when you engage the
parking brake and the ignition is
on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If the
parking brake is not engaged, this indicates
low brake fluid level or a brake system
malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by an authorized dealer.
WARNING
Driving a vehicle with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous. A
significant decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle. Have the vehicle checked by your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the parking
brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.
Cruise Control
E71340
It illuminates when you switch this
feature on. See Using Cruise
Control (page 200).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch the
left or right direction indicator or
the hazard warning flasher on. If
the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
for a burned out bulb.
101
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 269).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 268).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Fasten Safety Belt
It illuminates and a chime sounds
to remind you to fasten your safety
belt.
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate on startup,
continues to flash or remains on, it
indicates a malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. A
chime sounds when there is a malfunction
in the indicator light.
High Beam
It illuminates when the headlamp
high beam is switched on. It
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
E163171
Illuminates when you switch hill
descent on.
Liftgate Ajar
E162453
Lights when the liftgate is not
completely closed.
Low Fuel Level
It illuminates when the fuel level is
low or near empty. Refuel as soon
as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or
when driving, check your tire pressure as
soon as possible.
The lamp also illuminates momentarily when
you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash
at any time, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
102
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It illuminates when you switch the
parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain fault
has been detected. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon indicator
light stays illuminated after you
start the engine, it indicates that
the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has
detected a malfunction of the vehicle
emissions control system. Refer to On Board
Diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling
chapter for more information about having
your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control
System (page 168).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other
vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Have an authorized dealer service your
vehicle immediately.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when you first switch on the
ignition before engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready
for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light stays
on until you crank the engine, then turns
itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the service
engine soon light blinks eight times, it means
that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
See Emission Control System (page 168).
Stability Control System
E138639
Displays when the
AdvanceTrac®/Traction control is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately. See Using
Stability Control (page 190).
Stability Control System Off
Illuminates when you disable
AdvanceTrac™/Traction control.
See Using Stability Control (page
190).
103
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
E161509
Illuminates when you activate the
tow/haul feature. If the light flashes
steadily, have the system serviced
immediately. Damage to the transmission
could occur. See Automatic Transmission
(page 171).
4X2
E163173
Illuminates momentarily when you
engage two-wheel drive high. If the
light fails to display or remains on
when the ignition is on, have the system
serviced immediately by an authorized
dealer.
4X4 Auto
E166922
Illuminates when you engage the
four-wheel drive system. If the light
fails to display or remains on when
the ignition is on, have the system serviced
immediately by an authorized dealer.
4X4 HIGH
E163175
Illuminates when you engage
four-wheel drive high. If the light
fails to display or remains on when
the ignition is on, have the system serviced
immediately by an authorized dealer.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you leave the key in the
ignition and the driver door open.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is
not in the ignition) and the driver door is
open.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Direction Indicator Chime
Sounds when you leave the direction
indicator on after signaling a turn and driving
the vehicle more than 1.5 miles (2.4 km).
104
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display controls
on the steering wheel. Corresponding
information shows in the information display.
E205352
• Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or message.
The arrows in the upper left corner of the
display indicate additional content available
when lit.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:
• Display Mode.
• Trip/Fuel.
• Towing.
• Off Road.
• Settings.
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the
categories, then press the right arrow key or
OK to enter into that category. Press the left
arrow key as needed to exit back to the main
menu.
Display Mode
Use the arrow buttons to choose between
the following display options.
105
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Display Mode
Digital tachometer and fuel level gauge
Digital tachometer, fuel level gauge and engine coolant temperature gauge
Gauge Detail (Oil pressure, Oil temperature and Transmission temperature)
Engine Hours (Engine hours and Engine idle hours)
Oil Life
Distance to Empty
Digital Speedometer - Press OK to change the currently units displayed
Trip/Fuel
Use the arrow buttons to choose between
the following trip and fuel options.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed information.
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1 or Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
106
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
• Fuel Economy - Shows your
instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph
and average mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage
based on time. The graph is updated
each minute with the fuel economy that
you achieved during 30 minutes of
driving.
Towing
Use the arrow buttons to configure different
towing setting choices.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are optional.
Towing
Trailer disconnectedTrailer Status
Active trailer name or Default Trailer
Accumulated trailer miles
Trailer brake gain
Trailer Sway Control - check enabled or uncheck disabledTrailer Options
Elect. Surge, None or Elec. Over HydraulicTrailer Brake Mode
Trailers CreatedChange Trailer Selected
Default Trailer
No active trailer
Press OK to change the selected trailer
Rename TrailerChange Trailer Settings
Reset Trailer Mileage
107
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Towing
Delete Trailer
Add Trailer
Naming EditorAdd TrailerTrailer Setup
Ball Coupler Connected and locked?Connection Checklist
Electrical Wiring Connect?
Lights Function Correctly?
Safety Chains Connected?
Tongue Jack Raised?
Mirrors Adjusted?
TBC gain setting adjusted?
Trailer disconnected?
Off Road
In this mode, you can view different off road
information.
108
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Off Road
Off Road Status (Pitch, Roll, Wheel Angle)
Power Distribution Gauge – Displays the power distribution to the front and rear axles. The display varies based on 4x4 configuration and
driving conditions.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Sport, Normal or ComfortDriver Select Suspension
Normal or TowingDTE Calculation
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Easy Entry / Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabledVehicleAdvanced Settings
Select time intervalAutolamp DelayLighting
Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabledLocks
109
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
All Doors or DriverRemote Unlock
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to resetOil Life
Enable or Disable switchPower Liftgate
Auto, Off or OutPwr Running Boards
Auto or Last SettingClimate ControlRemote Start
Auto or OffSeats
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or uncheck disabledWipers
Rain Sensing - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Number of Admin Keys, MyKeys and MyKey MileageMyKey StatusMyKey*
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
Always On or User SelectableTraction Control
110
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
65 MPH (105 km/h), 70 MPH (110 km/h), 75 MPH (120
km/h), 80 MPH (130 km/h) or Off
Max Speed
45 mph (72 km/h), 55 mph (89 km/h), 65 mph (105 km/
h) or Off
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Miles & GAL, L/100km or km/LDistanceDisplay Setup
°Fahrenheit or °CelsiusTemperature
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge Display
Select Language - Hold OK to SetLanguage
*Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages display or are available. Certain
messages may be abbreviated or shortened
depending upon which cluster type you
have.
111
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
E205353
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages automatically clear
after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
AdvanceTrac™ / Traction Control Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when you switch the traction control system off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 187).
Traction control off/Traction control on
Displays when the system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
Displays when you switch AdvanceTrac off.AdvanceTrac Off
Displays when you switch AdvanceTrac on.AdvanceTrac On
112
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Alarm Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when unauthorized entry into the vehicle occurs. Switch the ignition on to stop the
alarm.
Vehicle Alarm to Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle
Battery and Charging System Messages
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off the ignition. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Check Charging System
Displays to warn of a low 12-volt battery condition. Switch off all unneeded electrical accessories.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Turn Power Off to Save Battery
Displays to warn of a low 12-volt battery condition. Switch off all unneeded electrical accessories.Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned
Off
113
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information System Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the blind spot information system/cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked.
Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displays when a fault with the blind spot information system occurs. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
Displays when the blind spot information system/cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked.
Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displays when a fault with the cross traffic alert system occurs. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System Fault
Displays when the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert (CTA) system is operating
and senses a vehicle.
Cross Traffic Vehicle Coming From X
114
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Brake System Messages
ActionMessage
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately.Brake Fluid Level Low
Displays when the brake system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Brake System
Displays when the parking brake is set, the vehicle is in ready to drive and the vehicle is driven
more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after you release the parking brake, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
Door Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
Displays when the liftgate or liftglass is not completely closed.Liftgate Ajar
Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad resets.Factory Keypad Code XXXXX
115
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Engine Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine
temperature.
Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp
Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine is on.Engine On
Fuel Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Displays as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
116
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Keys and Intelligent Access Messages
ActionMessage
Displas if the sytem does not detect the intelligent access key in the following three scenarios:
When you press the start/stop button in an attempt to either start the engine or cycle through
the ignition states. When the engine is running and a door is opened then closed. When the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 10 mph (16 km/h) for the first time after starting.
No Key Detected
Displays during spare key programming, when an intelligent access key is programmed to the
system.
Key Programmed x Keys Total
Displays during spare key programming when the maximum number of keys have been
programmed.
Max Number of Keys Programmed
Displays when you press the start/stop button without applying the brake pedal. This is a reminder
that you must apply the brake pedal when pressing the start/stop button in order to start the
engine.
Press Brake to Start
Displays when you press the start/stop button to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access
Key is not detected inside the vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Displays when the vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Accessory Power Active
This message displays when there is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
117
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance Messages
ActionMessage
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and switch off the engine. Check the oil level. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
LOW Engine Oil Pressure
Displays when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon
Displays when the oil life left reaches 0%.Oil Change Required
Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Overtemperature
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
Displays when the washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level LOW
Your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact Dealer
Your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact Dealer
118
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
MyKey™ Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey active Drive Safely
Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to xx MPH/km/h
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is
approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a
preselected speed.
Check Speed Drive Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder activates.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
Displays when attempting to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys.Could Not Program Integrated Key
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On MyKey Setting
MyKey park aid cannot be deactivated with a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated
119
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Off Road Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when your vehicle speed requirement for off road mode entry has not
been met.
For Off Road Slow to 5MPH
Displays when off road mode becomes active.Enter Off Road Mode Enabled
Displays when off road mode becomes inactive.Exiting Off Road Mode
Displays when hill descent control mode deactivates.Hill Descent Control Off
Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 MPH (32 KM/H).For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
Displays when hill descent control mode requires driver shift transmission into
gear.
For Hill Descent Select Gear
Displays when the hill control mode requires the driver to resume control.Hill Descent Driver Resume Control
Displays when a hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control FAULT
Displays when hill descent control mode disables to cool the brake system.Hill Descent Control OFF System Cooling
Displays when hill descent control mode activates.Hill Descent Control Ready
120
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Park Aid Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the transmission is in reverse (R) and the park aid disables.Check Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Displays when the transmission is in reverse (R) and the park aid disables.Check Rear Park Aid
Displays when the system detects a condition that requires service. See Parking Aids (page
195).
Check Front Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Power Steering Messages
ActionMessage
The power steering system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Steering loss Stop safely
The power steering system detects a condition within the power steering system that requires
service immediately. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering fault Service now
The power steering system disables power steering assist due to a system error. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Steering assist fault Service required
121
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Remote Start Messages
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to turn the key to on to drive the vehicle after a remote start.To Drive: Turn Key to On
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and the start button to drive the vehicle after a remote
start.
To Drive: Press Brake and START Button
Suspension System Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when there is a problem with your vehicle’ s suspension system. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Driver Select Susp. malfunction Service
required
122
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Tire Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure.Tire Pressure LOW
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
Displays when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use. See Wheels
and Tires (page 295). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized
dealer.
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Trailer Messages
ActionMessage
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer brake when a trailer is not
connected.
Trailer Brake Gain: XX.X No Trailer
Displays and a chime sounds in response to faults sensed by the TBC.Trailer Brake Module Fault
Displays when a correct trailer connection is sensed during a given ignition cycle.Trailer Connected
Displays when a trailer connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally
or unintentionally, and the system senses it during a given ignition cycle.
Disregard this status if your vehicle is not equipped with a factory installed trailer
brake controller. This message may appear when an aftermarket TBC is used
even when the trailer is connected.
Trailer Disconnected
123
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the trailer sway control detects trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
Displays if there are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and the trailer wiring or
brake system.
Wiring Fault On Trailer
Displays the current gain setting from the trailer brake.Trailer Brake Gain XX.X
There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module. See Towing a Trailer
(page 222).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault See Manual
There is a fault with your trailer stop lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Stop Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer park lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Park Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing a Trailer (page 222).Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual
Transmission Messages
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to shift into park (P).Transmission not in Park
124
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
E208604
Driver temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting using the control on the driver side.A
Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.B
Passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature on the passenger side.C
Heated seats: Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 144).D
125
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
E
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during
hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning
automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
F
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the
time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
G
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though
the air conditioning is switched off.
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.H
AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired
temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds.
I
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 130).J
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns
off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
K
Climate controlled seats: Press the button to switch the climate controlled seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page
145).
L
126
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. The system automatically adjusts
to heat or cool the cabin to your selected
temperature as quickly as possible. For the
system to function efficiently, the instrument
panel and side air vents should be fully
open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1. Select the MAX A/C function.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost button.
127
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
128
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS
E188689
129
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 144).B
Temperature control: Control the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle.C
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the instrument panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute
air through any combination of these vents.
D
Fan speed control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear passenger settings through the front controls.E
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice and
fog. The heated rear window will
automatically turn off after a short period of
time. Start the engine before you switch the
heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from the
inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
REMOTE START
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The
climate control system works to achieve
comfort according to your previous settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system to
its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back on,
such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
130
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays (page
105).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats
or cools (based on previous settings). The
rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated
seats do not automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster and
heated mirrors automatically turn on.
131
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take weight off the seat cushion and affect
the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death
in the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this can
cause the occupant to slide under the
safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during heavy
braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety
belt over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head
restraint when your vehicle is moving.
132
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when the
seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head
restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
E138642
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Second Row Outboard Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints are
non-adjustable, but you can fold them.
133
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E205038
The non-adjustable head restraints consist
of:
• A trimmed energy absorbing foam and
structure (A).
• A fold strap (B).
1. Pull the strap to fold the outboard head
restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place the
head restraint back to the upright
position.
Second Row Center Seat Head Restraint
The center rear head restraint is fixed and
non-adjustable. The head restraint consists
of a trimmed foam covering over the upper
structure of the seatback.
Third Row Head Restraints
The third row head restraints are non
adjustable, but you can fold them.
E205039
The non-adjustable head restraints consist
of:
• A trimmed energy absorbing foam and
structure (A).
• A fold strap (B).
1. Pull the strap to fold the head restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place the
head restraint back to the upright
position.
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that cargo
or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback.
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is moving.
Adjusting your seatback while your vehicle
is in motion may cause loss of control of your
vehicle.
134
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E181777
The control is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Move the switch in the direction
of the arrow to raise or lower the seat
cushion or to move the seat forward,
backward, up or down.
Power Recline
E162731
Move the control to recline the seatback
forward or rearward.
Note: On vehicles with memory seats, to
prevent damage to the seat, the power seats
are designed to set a stopping position just
short of the end of the seat track. If the seat
encounters an object while moving forward
or backward, a new stopping position will
be set.
To reset the seat to its normal stopping
position:
1. After encountering the new stopping
position, press the power seat control
again to override.
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the seat track.
3. Continue pressing the control for about
two seconds. You will feel the seat
bounce back slightly.
Power Lumbar
E164101
The control is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Press the forward or rearward
side of the control for more or less support.
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions
and that all occupants are clear of moving
parts.
135
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Do not use the memory function when
your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the position
of the following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Power steering column.
• Power adjustable foot pedals.
The memory control is located on the left
side of the driver seat.
2
1
E205043
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to two preset memory
positions.
You can save a memory preset at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Switch the ignition on.
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving position.
The memory features will move to the
position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall preset memory
position when you switch the ignition off, or
when you place the transmission in park (P)
or neutral (N) if you switch the ignition on.
Note: If you enable Easy Exit, a memory
recall when the ignition is off will move to
the easy exit position.
You can also recall a preset memory position
by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
remote control if it is linked to a preset
position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Locks (page
63).
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat and steering column to the
Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
control - power seat, mirror (or steering
column switch) (or any memory button)
during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
136
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
for about five seconds. A tone will sound
after about two seconds. Continue
holding until a second tone is heard.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in step 3, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote control
or intelligent access key is in range, the
memory function moves to the settings of
the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If Equipped)
This feature adjusts the position of the seat
and steering column to allow easier exit and
entry to the vehicle.
The driver seat automatically moves 2 inches
(5 centimeters) rearward when the
transmission is in park (P) and you remove
the key from the ignition or you switch the
ignition off.
The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you put the key in the ignition
or switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 105).
REAR SEATS
Folding Down the Second Row 40%
Seat
WARNINGS
Use caution when folding the seatback
to the flat back position as the system
will move forward when you lift the release
handle.
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that cargo
or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its
original position, pull on the seatback to
make sure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in
the event of a sudden stop or crash.
Make sure that the head restraint is in the
down position and no objects such as books,
purses or briefcases are on the floor in front
of the second row seats before folding them
down.
Move the front passenger seat forward so
that the second row seat head restraint
clears the front seat.
137
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E190842
1. Lower the head restraints by pulling on
the strap.
E205044
2. Locate the handle on the side of the seat
cushion by the door.
3. Pull up on the handle and push the
seatback forward toward the front of the
vehicle.
To return the seat to the upright position:
E205045
1. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Rotate the seatback until you hear a click,
locking it in the upright position.
E205046
3. Lift up on the head restraint until it locks
into its original position.
Placing the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seats in Cargo Mode
WARNINGS
Use caution when folding the seatback
to the flat back position as the system
will move forward when you lift the release
handle.
Always return the seat from the kneel
position prior to raising the seatback.
Failure to do so could result in personal
injury.
138
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Place the second-row seats in a kneel down
load floor position to allow more cargo
space.
To place the seats in the cargo mode:
1. Fold down the second row seat.
E205047
2. Pull the cargo mode lever up to release
the seat into a kneel down load floor
position.
Returning to the Upright Position from
the Full Lowered Load Floor Position
You cannot return the seatback to the
upright position until the seat is returned
from the kneel down position.
To return the seat to the upright position:
E205048
1. Push the seat rearward until the latch is
engaged.
2. Return the seatback to the upright
position.
Adjusting the Second Row Outboard
40% Seat for E-Z Entry
WARNINGS
Always latch the vehicle seat to the
floor, whether the seat is occupied or
empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
WARNINGS
After using the E-Z Entry feature, make
sure there are not any objects, cargo
or the feet of a third row passenger under
the second row seat when latching the seat
to the floor. Injury to the third row passengers
feet or damage to the seat may occur.
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that cargo
or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its
original position, pull on the seatback to
make sure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in
the event of a sudden stop or crash.
The E-Z entry seat allows for easier entry and
exit to and from the third row seat.
To enter the third row seat:
139
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E205049
1. Fold down the second row seat and
release the handle.
2. Pull the handle up again until the seat
releases from the floor.
3. Push the seat upward and fold it away
from the third row.
To return the seat to a seating position:
E205050
1. Push the seat down and latch to the floor.
2. Bring the seatback to an upright position.
The seatback should lock into position.
Note: If the seatback will not return to the
upright position, tumble the seat again and
re-latch it to the floor. Be sure that cargo or
other objects are not trapped underneath
the seatback.
E205051
Note: If a squeak is heard from the latch
area, the latch striker pin should be wiped
clean of dust or debris.
140
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Exiting the Third Row
E205052
1. Pull the strap located at the bottom
outboard of the seatback to release the
seat from the floor, and rotate the seat
up toward the front seat.
2. Follow the directions above to return the
seat from the E-Z entry to the upright
position.
Reclining the Second Row Outboard
40% Seatback
WARNING
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat’s
safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.
E205053
The release handle is located on the
outboard side of the seat cushion. Lift it to
adjust the seatback to your desired position.
Folding the Second Row Center 20%
Seat (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To prevent possible damage to the
seat or safety belts, make sure that the
safety belts are not buckled when moving
the seat to the load floor position.
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that cargo
or any objects are not trapped underneath
the seatback. After returning the seatback
to its original position, pull on the seatback
to make sure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in
the event of a sudden stop or crash.
141
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E205054
1. Locate the release handle in the upper
left seatback. Pull the handle to release
the folding seat latch.
E205055
2. With the latch released, lower the
seatback into the load floor position.
E205056
3. To return the seat to the upright position,
lift the seatback until the latch is fully
engaged.
Adjusting the Second Row Center 20%
Seat (If Equipped)
Note: Move this seat forward to keep a child
in a child restraint close to the front seat
occupants. Move the seat to the full
rearward position when it is occupied by
older children or adults, including children
in booster seats.
E205057
Lift the handle to move the seat forward or
backward.
PowerFold™ Third Row Seat
Note: The power fold down seats operate
for 10 minutes after you switch the ignition
off. The transmission must be in park (P) and
the liftgate, or liftgate glass must be open.
Similar to the battery saver feature, the
power third row seat disables 10 minutes
after you switch the ignition off.
Note: Be sure that the head restraints are
folded down before powering the third row
seat down.
142
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E205060
The control buttons are located on the
right-hand rear quarter trim panel (accessible
from the liftgate area).
A
B
C
E211424
Press to fold the third row left side
seatback down.
A
Press to fold both seatbacks down.B
Press to fold the third row right
side seatback down.
C
To return the seatback(s) to the original
position(s), press the corresponding control
again.
If the power third row seat is disabled after
10 minutes, you can enable the seat by:
• Opening any door.
• Pressing the unlock button on the key
fob.
• Pressing any keyless entry keypad
button.
143
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HEATED SEATS
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain to
their skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the heated seat to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious personal
injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Rear Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
144
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch to
enable heating mode. When activated, they
will turn off automatically when you turn the
engine off.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
Heated Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spill on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the
engine is running.
145
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the
engine is running.
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself
off. You will need to reactivate it.
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement
The climate controlled seat system includes
air filters. You must replace them periodically.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page 353).
Locate the filters under each front seat and
access them from the second-row footwell
area. Move the front seats all the way
forward and to the full up positions to ease
access.
E146319
To remove a filter:
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Press up on the outside rigid edge of the
filter and rotate counterclockwise once
the tabs are released, then remove the
filter.
146
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E146321
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its housing
making sure that the far forward end is
all the way up in the housing.
2. Push in on the center of the outside edge
of the filter and rotate up into the housing
until it clips into position.
147
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are programming. Do
not program the system with the vehicle in
the garage.
Do not use the system with any garage
door opener that does not have the
safety stop and reverse feature as required
by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this
includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury
or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the current
settings. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below assume
you will be programming HomeLink that was
not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
148
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further action
is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
149
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter until
the HomeLink indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapidly blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
150
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.
151
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’ s authority
to operate the equipment.
152
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Do not use a power point for operating
a cigar lighter. Incorrect use of the
power points can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory
plug into the power point. This will damage
the power point and blow the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the rear cargo area.
• On the passenger side floor panel.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices plugged
in the power point whenever the
device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power
point, since it will defeat the safety protection
design. Doing so may cause the power point
to overload due to powering multiple devices
that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point will turn off when the
ignition is switched off or the battery voltage
drops below 11 volts.
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on
the rear of the center console.
153
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
E193395
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point cover may open to the right or upward.
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition is
off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and
switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition
back on, but do not plug your device back
in. Let the system cool off and switch the
ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch
the ignition back on and make sure the
indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical equipment
or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
154
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E205765
Cup holder.A
Storage compartment, coin holder,
tissue box holder, and USB ports.
B
Power point, rear climate controls,
and 110 volt AC power point.
C
Rear cup holders.D
Side storage.E
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
155
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine speeds
can produce very high temperatures
in the engine and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8
kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving characteristics
during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Ignition Modes
E191075
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational and
the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once.
156
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: You may have to press the push
button ignition switch twice to switch the
ignition on.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears
in the information display alerting you that
you exceeded the cranking time. You
cannot attempt to start the engine for at
least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are
limited to a 15-second engine cranking time.
You need to wait 60 minutes before you can
crank the engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park (P).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle to shift the transmission
out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the
following:
157
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
1
E198728
2
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the passive key in this position, you
can use the push button ignition switch
to switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching
it off, even if it does not detect a valid
passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the push
button ignition switch. After 20 seconds, you
can no longer start your vehicle if it does not
detect a valid passive key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close a
door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key. You
cannot start your vehicle if the system does
not detect a valid passive key within 20
seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
158
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the engine
if it has been idling for an extended period.
The ignition also turns off to save battery
power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a
message appears in the information display
showing a timer counting down. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, your vehicle
shuts down. Another message appears in
the information display to inform you that
your vehicle has shut down to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as normal.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. When you switch
it off temporarily, it turns on at the next
ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Interacting with your vehicle, for example
pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 105). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the feature
off for the current ignition cycle only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shuts
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will
be required. When the ignition is switched
off, some electrical circuits, including air
bags, warning lamps and indicators may also
be off. If the ignition was turned off
accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and
re-start the engine.
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within two
seconds.
159
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its
dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow it
to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This could
damage the power cable and may cause an
electrical short resulting in fire, injury and
property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’ s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
160
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
161
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel capless
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound
stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which
could cause serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle
can produce static electricity. This can
cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded
fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the filler neck. Never smoke or
use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor
is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is
highly toxic and if swallowed can cause
death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may
not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to
eye and respiratory tract irritation. In
severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with water
for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
162
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and wash
skin thoroughly with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact with
fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
gasoline vapors, or skin contact could
cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or
sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly
with soap and water. Consult a physician
immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. We do not recommend fuels with an
octane rating below 87.
For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, to
provide improved performance, we
recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
163
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which
is a manganese-based fuel additive, will
impair engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine. If your vehicle is out
of fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel
may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel into
the fuel system filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the household
refuse or the public sewage system.
Use an authorized waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the plastic funnel included
with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel
Location (page 164).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
will not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
164
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages and remove the fuel tank filler
cap.
Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a
fuel tank filler cap.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and close
the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back
in your vehicle or properly dispose of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island.
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never
smoke or use a cell phone while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
WARNINGS
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow
any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this will fill the
expansion space in the fuel tank and could
lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
165
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded
fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold the
fuel pump handle in the fill position.
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P) and switch the ignition off.
2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages.
E156032
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch on the nozzle. Hold handle higher
during insertion for easier access. Leave
the fuel pump nozzle fully inserted until
you are done pumping.
E154765
4. Remove the fuel filler nozzle and fully
close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the
tank. The fill pipe is equipped with a drain
hole. Excess fuel due to overfill may drain
through the drain hole and drip onto the
ground.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a
service engine warning lamp may appear on
the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
166
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any
visible debris from the fuel fill opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel
fill funnel provided with the vehicle
several times to allow the inlet to close
properly. This will dislodge any debris
preventing the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It may
take several driving cycles for the message
to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an
engine start-up (after 4 or more hours with
the engine off) followed by city or highway
driving. Continuing to drive with the message
on may cause the service engine soon lamp
to turn on as well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel
in the empty reserve varies and should not
be relied upon to increase driving range.
• The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that can be added into
the tank after the gauge indicates empty
• The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 328). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the empty
reserve.
• Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank even
when the fuel gauge reads empty.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high)
each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is your
engine’s break-in period). A more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2,000 mi
(3,200 km) to 3,000 mi (4,800 km). Also, fuel
expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge
readings are not accurate ways to measure
fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
167
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per gallon)
fuel consumption, divide miles traveled by
gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of your
vehicle’ s fuel economy under current driving
conditions. Keeping records during summer
and winter will show how temperature
impacts fuel economy.
Conditions
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces fuel
economy.
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks may reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can
start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you smell
exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your
dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a catalytic
converter that will enable your vehicle to
comply with applicable exhaust emission
standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control
components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
168
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of components
affecting emission control, such non-Ford
parts should be the equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance
and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the environment
by making sure that your vehicle continues
to meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists a service
technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
• the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
• poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
• the fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 165).
• driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
169
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city/highway driving. No
additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing
Some state/provincial and local governments
may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from
getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
you may need to have the vehicle
serviced. See On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, your
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the
ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you may
need to perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours
without starting the engine. Then, start the
engine and complete the above driving
cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal
operating temperature. Once started, do not
turn off the engine until the above driving
cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not
ready for I/M testing, you will have to repeat
the above driving cycle.
170
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
latch the gearshift in park (P). Turn the
ignition to the off position and remove the
key whenever you leave your vehicle.
Do not use the tow/haul feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions as
the increased engine braking can cause the
rear wheels to slide and your vehicle to
swing around with the possible loss of
vehicle control.
Selector Lever Positions
E209112
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the desired
gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the rear wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold
the brake pedal down while in this position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
Manual (M)
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), you
can change gears up or down as desired by
using buttons on the shift lever. See
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™
transmission later in this section.
171
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Second (2)
Transmission operates in second (2) gear
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on
slippery roads.
First (1)
• Transmission operates in first (1) gear
only.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into first (1) gear at high
speeds; allows for first (1) gear when
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Tow/Haul Mode
E161509
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the gearshift lever once.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
The tow/haul feature:
• Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
of transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which will slow your vehicle and
assist you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a grade.
• Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided will vary
based upon the amount the brake pedal
is pressed.
The tow/haul feature improves transmission
operation when towing a trailer or a heavy
load. All transmission gear ranges are
available when using tow/haul.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return
to normal driving mode, press the button on
the gearshift lever twice. The TOW HAUL
light will deactivate. Tow/haul will also
deactivate when you power down your
vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use the tow/haul feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions as
the increased engine braking can cause the
rear wheels to slide and your vehicle to
swing around with the possible loss of
vehicle control.
Forced Downshifts
• Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul
feature on or off.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of
your vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission
may have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This
operation is considered normal and will not
affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
172
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ Transmission (If Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission gearshift lever. The
SelectShift Automatic transmission gives you
the ability to change gears up or down
(without a clutch) as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift will still automatically make
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time. Although
SelectShift will make some downshifts for
you, it will still allow you to downshift at any
time as long as the SelectShift determines
that damage will not be caused to the engine
from over-revving.
SelectShift will not automatically upshift, even
if the engine is approaching the RPM limit. It
must be shifted manually by pressing the +
button.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
Progressive Range Selection (PRS)
Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with an
improved driving experience (for example,
in slippery conditions or when experiencing
a steep grade).
With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press the
– button to active PRS. The available and
selected gears are indicated on the
instrument cluster.
All available gears will display with the
current gear indicated. Press the – button
again to lock out gears beginning with the
highest gear. Example: press the – button
twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only the
available gears will display and the
transmission will automatically shift between
the available gears. Press the + button to
unlock gears to allow the transmission to
shift to higher gears. The transmission will
shift automatically within the gear range you
select.
Manual (M)
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual (M)
position will allow you to manually select the
gear you desire. Only the current gear will
display. Use the buttons on the gearshift
lever to manually select gears. Press the +
button to upshift or the – button to downshift.
Return the transmission to a different
gearshift position to deactivate manual
control.
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
173
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 – 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 – 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 – 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 – 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 – 6
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking your vehicle out of park (P)
which means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always
fully set the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNINGS
If you fully release the parking brake
and the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the ignition
is in the on position and the brake pedal is
not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of
park (P) position with the ignition in the on
position and the brake pedal pressed, a
malfunction may have occurred. It is possible
that a fuse has blown or your vehicle’ s brake
lamps are not operating properly. See Fuse
Specification Chart (page 250).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps
are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the ignition
key to the off position, then remove the
key.
174
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
2. Move the steering column to the full
down and full rearward position (toward
the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
4. Place fingers into gearshift lever boot
hole and pull top half of shroud up and
forward to separate it from the lower half
of the shroud. There is a hinge at the
forward edge of the top shroud. Roll the
top half of the shroud upward on the
hinge point to clear the hazard flasher
button, then pull straight rearward toward
the driver’s seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the
column that secure the lower shroud half
to the column.
E163185
7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked
position and remove the lower shroud
cover by pulling the lever handle through
the slot in the cover.
E163186
8. Apply the brake, pull the white disk then
move the shifter to neutral (N).
9. Start your vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
making sure to engage the hinge pivots
between the upper and lower halves of the
shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as the halves rotate together.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
175
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
WARNING
For important information regarding
safe operation of this type of vehicle,
see General Information in the Wheels and
Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4X4 mode is
only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces.
Your four-wheel drive vehicle features the
heavy-duty Control Trac® 4WD system. This
unique system is interactive with the road,
continually monitoring and adjusting torque
delivery to the front and rear wheels to
optimize vehicle control.
4WD Indicator Lights
The indicator lights illuminate in the
information display in the reconfigurable
telltale (RTT) location under the following
conditions. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 101).
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system will typically remain in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized dealer.
4X2
E163173
Momentarily illuminates when 4X2
is selected.
4X4 AUTO
E181781
Continuously illuminates when 4X4
AUTO is selected.
4X4
E207351
Continuously illuminates when 4X4
is selected.
CHECK 4X4
Displays when a 4X4 fault is
present.
4WD Switch Positions
WARNING
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles
are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles.
176
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: The AdvanceTrac® with RSC® stability
enhancement system can be turned off
manually by pressing the AdvanceTrac
button. See Using Traction Control (page
187). This will disable the engine
management feature, allowing the vehicle
to maintain full power and enhanced
momentum through the obstacle.
Note: The Control Trac® selector switch
should not be changed while the rear wheels
are slipping.
E207352
The Control Trac® system functions in three
modes:
• 4X2 delivers power to the rear wheels
only. The information display will
momentarily display 4x2 when this mode
is selected. This mode is appropriate for
normal on-road driving on dry pavement
and provides the best fuel economy.
• 4X4 AUTO provides electronic control
four-wheel drive with power delivered to
all four wheels, as required, for increased
traction. The information display will
display 4A when this mode is selected.
This mode is appropriate for all on-road
driving conditions, such as dry road
surfaces, wet pavement, snow, or gravel.
• 4X4 provides electronically locked
four-wheel drive power to front and rear
wheels. The information display will
display 4X4 when this mode is selected.
This mode is not recommended for use
on dry pavement. This mode is only
intended for severe winter or off-road
conditions, such as deep snow, ice or
shallow sand.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal while a shift in progress message
displays will improve
engagement/disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
Press any button (4X2, 4X4 AUTO or 4X4) at
a stop or while driving. The information
display may display a message indicating a
4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is
complete the information display will then
display the system mode selected.
177
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles
WARNING
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity
such as utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles handle differently than vehicles with
a lower center of gravity. Utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
could result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or damaging
underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times,
especially in rough terrain. Since sudden
changes in terrain can result in abrupt
steering wheel motion, make sure you grip
the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the area.
To maintain steering and braking control of
your vehicle, you must have all four wheels
on the ground and they must be rolling, not
sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
the vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a
front air dam that can become damaged
(due to reduced ground clearance) when
taking your vehicle off-road. This air dam
can be taken off by removing two bolts.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat different
from conventional vehicles, both on and off
the road.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through
a transfer case. On Four-wheel drive
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to
select different 4WD modes when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures can be found in this
chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the
Maintenance chapter. You should become
thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
178
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you
to drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Basic Operating Principles
• Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and
may damage drive components. 4X4
mode is only intended for consistently
slippery or loose surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been reduced
ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do
not turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of the
road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than attempt
a sudden return to the road which could
cause your vehicle to slide sideways out of
control or roll over. Remember, your safety
and the safety of others should be your
primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure
a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute, damage to the transmission and
tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle
(i.e. turn the steering wheel only as rapidly
and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
179
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration
and braking. This could result in an increased
risk of vehicle roll over, loss of vehicle control
and personal injury. Use all available road
surface to bring your vehicle to a safe
direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of surface
to another (i.e. from concrete to gravel) there
will be a change in the way your vehicle
responds to a maneuver (i.e. steering,
acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid excessive wheel slip.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck to
the point that assistance may be required
from another vehicle. Remember, you may
be able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the vehicle.
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may be
limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in
slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle
are submerged in water, their fluids should
be checked and changed, if necessary.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,
the axle lubricant should be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
E143950
180
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities in
our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly”.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn around
because this could cause vehicle roll over.
It is better to reverse back to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral. Disengage overdrive
or move the transmission selector lever to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose
control. The front wheels have to be turning
in order to steer your vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the
brakes steadily. Do not pump the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery conditions
that require tire chains or cables, then
it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep
speeds down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive steering to
reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle
control which can lead to serious injury or
death. If the rear end of your vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of your vehicle.
181
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
will not stop any faster as braking occurs at
all four wheels. Do not become
overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Do not pump the brake pedal. See Hints on
Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 184).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and tested
to provide predictable performance whether
loaded or empty. For this reason, we strongly
recommend that you do not make
modifications such as adding or removing
parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle to
roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect you and
your passenger's safety. We recommend you
frequently inspect your vehicle's chassis
components when your vehicle is subject to
off road usage.
182
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
This axle provides added traction on slippery
surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on
a poor traction surface. Under normal
conditions, the limited-slip axle functions like
a standard rear axle. The axle may exhibit a
slight noise or vibration during tight turns
with low vehicle speed. This is normal
behavior and indicates the axle is working.
183
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Rear Axle
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and an
authorized dealer should check them. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, an
authorized dealer should check your vehicle.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels
(page 292).
E138644
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 101).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Switch
the engine off, move the transmission to park
(P) and apply the parking brake. Inspect the
accelerator pedal and the area around it for
any items or debris that may be obstructing
its movement. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at which
you press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal. Emergency brake assist can
reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you switch the ignition on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the anti-lock
braking system may be disabled. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
the anti-lock brake system is disabled,
normal braking is still effective.
E138644
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
184
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the transmission is placed
in park (P). Failure to set the parking brake
and engage park could result in vehicle
roll-away, property damage or bodily injury.
Turn the ignition to the lock position and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
Apply the parking brake whenever your
vehicle is parked. Press the pedal downward
to set the parking brake. The brake warning
lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate
and remains illuminated until the parking
brake is released.
To release, pull the brake release lever
located at the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade or
with a trailer, press and hold the brake pedal
down, then set the parking brake. There may
be a little vehicle movement as the parking
brake sets to hold the vehicle's weight. This
is normal and should be no reason for
concern. If needed, press and hold the
service brake pedal down, then try
reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking brake and
shift the transmission into park (P) (automatic
transmission) or first gear (1) (manual
transmission).
You must remain in your vehicle once
you have activated the system.
During all times, you are responsible
for controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening, if required.
If the engine is revved excessively, or
if a malfunction is detected, the system
will be deactivated.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
185
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
When the system is active, your vehicle will
remain stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows you time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The
brakes release automatically when the
engine has sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the grade. This is
an advantage when pulling away on a slope,
for example from a car park ramp, traffic
lights or when reversing uphill into a parking
space.
The system will activate automatically on any
slope that will cause significant vehicle
rollback. For vehicles with a manual
transmission, you can switch this feature off
using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 105). The system
will remain on or off depending on how it
was last set.
Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto
Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available
while Auto Hold is active.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete
standstill. Keep the brake pedal pressed
and select an uphill gear (for example,
first (1) when facing uphill or reverse (R)
when facing downhill).
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is
on a slope, the system will activate
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain on
the slope without rolling away for about
two or three seconds. This hold time will
automatically be extended if you are in
the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will release automatically.
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch this feature on or off if your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display. See
General Information (page 105). The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display, you
cannot turn the system on or off. When you
switch the ignition on, the system
automatically turns on.
186
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily if the system
detects a failure. Make sure you did not
manually disable the traction control system
using the switch. If the stability control and
traction control light is still illuminating
steadily, have the system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Operating
your vehicle with traction control disabled
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
E166706
The switch for the stability and traction
control system is on the instrument panel.
When you switch the system off, a message
and an illuminated icon appear on the
instrument cluster.
Use the switch again to return the traction
control system to normal operation.
Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictions
regarding this feature. See Principle of
Operation (page 54).
187
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes when
a driving condition activates either of the
systems.
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on:
• When you switch the traction control
system off.
• If a problem occurs in either of the
systems.
188
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving braking
system, aftermarket roof racks,
suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability control
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front
center console, the tunnel, and the front
seats in order to minimize the risk of
interfering with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the
electronic stability control system could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNINGS
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose control
of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal
injury or property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your electronic stability
control system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the systems applies higher
brake forces.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing
engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it
changes by applying the brakes to one or
more wheels individually.
189
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 187).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
Stability Control and Traction Control
with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC™)
The system automatically activates when you
start your engine. You can switch off the
electronic stability control and roll stability
control portions of the system below 35 mph
(56 km/h). When the transmission is in
reverse (R), they are disabled. You can switch
off the traction control portion of the system
independently. See Using Traction Control
(page 187).
190
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features
Traction control systemElectronic stability controlRoll stability controlStability control OFF lightButton functions
EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminated during bulb
check
Default at start-up
Disabled
1
Enabled
1
EnabledIlluminatedButton pressed moment-
arily
Disabled
4
DisabledDisabledFlashes then illuminated
solid
2
Button pressed and held
for more than 5 seconds at
vehicle speed under 35
mph (56 km/h)
Disabled
1
Enabled
1
EnabledIlluminatedVehicle speed exceeds 35
mph (56 km/h) after button
is pressed and held for
more than 5 seconds
191
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features
EnabledEnabledEnabledNot illuminatedButton pressed again after
deactivation
Disabled
4
DisabledDisabledIlluminatedButton not pressed and the
transfer case is switched
to 4WD Low
3
1
The traction control system may still be enabled but with higher entry thresholds compared to the full system. The electronic stability control
entry thresholds are higher compared to the full system.
2
When you press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds the indicator lamp blinks for three seconds.
3
Your vehicle may or may not have this feature available. When you select 4WD low the stability control light illuminates and all stability control
with RSC features are disabled.
4
Engine traction control and two-wheel spin brake traction control functions are disabled. Single wheel spin traction control is always enabled.
192
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
USING HILL DESCENT CONTROL
Principle of Operation
WARNINGS
Hill descent control cannot control
descent in all surface conditions and
circumstances, such as ice or extremely
steep grades. Hill descent control is a driver
assist system and cannot substitute for good
judgment by the driver. Failure to do so may
result in loss of vehicle control, crash or
serious injury.
Hill descent control does not provide
hill hold at 0 mph (0 km/h). When
stopped, the parking brake must be applied
or the vehicle must be placed in park (P) or
it may roll away.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep grades in various surface
conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). Above
20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but descent speed cannot be set or
maintained.
Hill descent control requires a cooling down
interval after sustained use. The amount of
time that the feature can remain active
before cooling varies with conditions. The
system provides a warning in the message
center and a chime sounds when the system
is about to disengage for cooling. At this
time, manually apply the brakes to maintain
descent speed.
Using Hill Descent Control
Press and release the hill descent
button in the center of the terrain
management control. The button
illuminates and a chime sounds when you
switch this feature on.
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the desired
speed. To decrease descent speed, press
the brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
you reach the desired descent speed,
remove your feet from the pedals and hill
descent control maintains the chosen vehicle
speed.
Note: You may observe noise from the ABS
pump motor during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.
193
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
Hill Descent Modes
DescriptionInformation Display Message
Displays at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h) when you press the Hill
Descent Control and Hill Descent Control activates.
Hill Descent Control Active
Displays at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h) when you press the Hill
Descent Control switch and conditions are not correct for hill descent
activation.
Hill Descent Control Ready
Displays at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h) when you press the Hill
Descent Control switch.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed 20MPH or Less
Displays when you press the Hill Descent Control switch and the
vehicles is in park (P) or neutral (N).
For Hill Descent Select Gear
Refer to the Information Displays for
additional Hill Descent Control messages.
See Information Messages (page 111).
194
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations of
the system as contained in this section.
Sensing is only an aid for some (generally
large and fixed) objects when moving on a
flat surface at parking speeds. Certain
objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves, surrounding vehicle's parking aid
systems, traffic control systems, fluorescent
lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and
external motors and fans may also affect the
function of the sensing system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
WARNINGS
This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
The system is designed to provide a warning
to assist the driver in detecting large
stationary objects to avoid damaging your
vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the
ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create
false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 54).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear
sensing system may detect that add-on
device and therefore provide warnings. It is
suggested that you disable the rear sensing
system when you attach an add-on device
to your vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 105).
Note: On vehicles with front parking aid you
can use the parking aid switch to switch the
system off.
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 111).
195
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 10 in (25 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object
farther than 10 in (25 cm) from the corners
of the bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the
rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or
less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
FRONT PARKING AID
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P) and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h).
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. There is decreased
coverage area at the outer corners.
The system sounds an audible warning when
obstacles are near either bumper in the
following manner:
• Objects detected by the front sensors
are indicated by a high-pitched tone from
the front of the vehicle.
• Objects detected by the rear sensors are
indicated by a lower pitched tone from
the rear of the vehicle.
196
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
• The sensing system reports the obstacle
which is closest to the front or rear of the
vehicle. For example, if an obstacle is
12 in (30 cm) from the front of the vehicle
and, at the same time, an obstacle is only
6 in (15 cm) from the rear of the vehicle,
the lower pitched tone sounds.
• An alternating warning sounds from the
front and rear if there are objects at both
bumpers that are closer than 10 in
(25 cm).
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that still
requires the driver to use it in conjunction
with the interior and exterior mirrors for
maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper,
might not be seen on the screen due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNINGS
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your reaction
time to stop your vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear video
camera and the luggage compartment
door is ajar. If the luggage compartment door
is ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display
which represent your vehicle’s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
E162528
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).
197
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system uses two types of guides to help
you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of your
vehicle with an object (for example, a
trailer).
Note: The image may remain on
momentarily when you shift the transmission
out of reverse (R). If your vehicle speed
reaches 6 mph (10 km/h) or 10 seconds
elapse and the image remains on, have your
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and you might not see some objects. In some
vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once
you engage the trailer tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to damage
to the rear of your vehicle.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if fixed
guidelines are on.
E163914
A
E
D
C
B
Rear bumperA
Fixed guideline: Red ZoneB
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneC
Fixed guideline: Green zoneD
CenterlineE
198
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
Camera System Settings
Rear view camera system settings can be
accessed through the multifunctional display.
See General Information (page 105).
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights which appear on top of the video
image when an object is detected by the
reverse sensing system. The alert highlights
the closest object detected. The reverse
sensing alert can be disabled and if visual
park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas
are still displayed.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full area
behind your vehicle is not shown. Be
aware of your surroundings when using the
manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom
in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol on
the camera screen to change the view. The
default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R).
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
199
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the road
surface is slippery. This could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above the
set speed. The system will not apply the
brakes but a warning displays. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
E208730
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On and Off
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator changes color in the instrument
cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
200
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the Information display
the set speed changes in approximately
2 km/h increments. When you select mph
as the display measurement in the
information display the set speed
changes in approximately 1 mph
increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release SET +.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RSM.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system is
in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
201
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m)
beyond the bumper. The system is designed
to alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind
spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through
the blind spot zone, typically fewer than two
seconds, the system does not trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns on
when you start the engine and you drive your
vehicle forward above 5 mph (8 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System remains on while the
transmission is in drive (D). If shifted into
reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot Information
System turns back on when you drive your
vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears except
the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
202
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the
approaching vehicle is coming from. When
the Blind Spot Information System is alerting
on a vehicle and the corresponding turn
signal is ON, the Blind Spot Information
System alert indicator flashes as an
increased warning level.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
at the same time.
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow
in front of the sensors and/or driving in heavy
rain can cause system degradation. Also,
other types of obstructions in front of the
sensor can cause system degradation. This
is referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the BLIS alert
indicators will remain ON and BLIS will no
longer provide any vehicle warnings. You
can clear the information display warning but
the alert indicators will remain illuminated.
203
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in two
ways:
• After the blockage in front of the sensors
is removed or the rainfall/snowfall rate
decreases or stops, drive for a few
minutes in traffic to allow the sensors to
detect passing vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Blind Spot Information
System off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but
no factory equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the Blind Spot
Information System off manually. Operating
the Blind Spot Information System with a
trailer attached will cause poor system
performance.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the left
or right sensor, the telltale will illuminate and
a message will appear in the information
display. See Information Messages (page
111).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page 105).
When the Blind Spot Information System
switches off, you will not receive alerts and
the information display shows a system off
message. The telltale in the cluster also
illuminates. When you switch the Blind Spot
Information System on or off, the alert
indicators flash twice.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
remembers the last selected on or off setting.
You can also have the Blind Spot Information
System switched off permanently at an
authorized dealer. Once switched off
permanently, the system can only be
switched back on at an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the Cross Traffic Alert system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross Traffic
Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions while
your transmission is in reverse (R).
204
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect
vehicles that approach with a speed up to
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when
the sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Reversing slowly helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
205
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.
206
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an amber
alert indicator in the outside mirror on the
side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle
is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert also
sounds an audible alert and a message
appears in the information display indicating
a vehicle is coming from the right or left.
Cross Traffic Alert works with the reverse
sensing system that sounds its own series
of tones. See Rear Parking Aid (page 196).
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow
or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,
this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 202). If the Blind Spot
Information System is blocked, Cross Traffic
Alert is also blocked. A corresponding
message appears in the information display
as soon as you shift the transmission into
reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather conditions
or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds
greater than 37 mph (60 km/h).
207
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert off.
If your vehicle has a tow bar but no factory
equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert
with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross
Traffic Alert performance.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will appear
in the information display. See Information
Messages (page 111).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic Alert
off in the information display. See General
Information (page 105). When you switch
Cross Traffic Alert off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display will display
a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently, the
system can only be switched back on at an
authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a
message displays in the information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and watch
the information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If the system detects an error, you may
not feel a difference in the steering,
however a serious condition may exist.
Obtain immediate service from an authorized
dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of
steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
208
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
DRIVE CONTROL
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln Drive
Control will respond to your preferences
based on what gear position you select. This
provides a single location to control multiple
systems performance settings.
Lincoln Drive Control consists of the
following systems:
• Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock absorbers
stiffness in real time to match the road
surface and driver inputs. This system
continuously monitors your vehicle’s
motion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions,
and steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
• Adaptive steering optimizes your
vehicle's steering response based on
your steering wheel input, changes in
vehicle speed and other conditions.
209
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
• Active noise control utilizes your vehicle
electronics to enhance the acoustic
experience.
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving.
• Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.
Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the Drive Control
modes are active when your vehicle is in
drive (D) or in Sport (S). The configuration
remains active until modified from the main
menu on the information display.
These systems have a range of modes which
you can choose from in order to customize
your ideal driving experience:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from a luxury vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control.
The engine responds more directly to
your inputs and takes on a more powerful
tone. Sport mode is ideal for use during
more spirited driving.
You can change your vehicle’s Drive
Control settings from the main menu on
the information display:
Settings
Drive ControlVehicle
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system
to ensure proper operation. Certain types of
system errors will gray out the mode
selections within the information display,
preventing you from changing states when
the gear position is changed. Other types of
errors will produce a temporary message
that states Drive Control Malfunction. If either
condition persists for multiple key cycles,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
210
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
SELF-LEVELING SUSPENSION
The self-leveling suspension system is
designed to improve ride, handling and
general vehicle performance during:
• Certain road conditions
• Steering maneuvers
• Braking
• Acceleration
• Towing
This system keeps the rear of your vehicle
at a constant level through a hydraulic pump
inside each rear shock. Depending on the
payload or road surface conditions it will take
approximately 2 mi (3.2 km) for the leveling
to complete.
If the loaded vehicle is not moved for
approximately 12 hours, the leveling system
may bleed down to a lower height. This can
be especially apparent if a trailer is left
attached to the parked vehicle for long
periods of time. You must drive your vehicle
in order to re-level the suspension.
If a self-equalizing hitch is used, your vehicle
should be driven approximately 2 mi (3.2 km)
with the trailer prior to adjusting (leveling)
the hitch.
211
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE
Cargo Management System
E205355
A storage compartment is located in the floor
of the rear cargo area.
Lift up on the handle to open the cover.
To close, lower the cover and press down
on the handle until the latch clicks.
Cargo Shelf and Divider (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not load any objects on the shelf
that may obstruct your vision or strike
occupants of the vehicle in the case of a
sudden stop or collision.
Do not place people or pets on or
under the parcel shelf.
Note: Do not put more than 30 lb (14 kg) on
shelf.
The cargo shelf and divider is located behind
the rear seat of your vehicle and has two
positions:
• A flat shelf, which pivots up and snaps
into place.
• A divider, which pivots up and snaps
vertically into place.
To move the shelf to the shelf position:
E205356
Pull up and pivot the shelf over the channels
on the side trim panels and snap the shelf
ends in the channels.
212
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
To move the shelf to the divider position:
E205357
Pull up and pivot the shelf over the channels
on the side trim panels and snap vertically
in place.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low center of
gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers
of gravity, may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the crossbars, is 200 lb
(90 kg).
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars affixed
to the roof rack side rails. When using the
roof rack system, we recommend you use
Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed
specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the load.
Check the tightness of the load before
driving and at each fuel stop.
Adjusting the Crossbar
E142448
1. Loosen the thumbwheels at both ends
of the crossbar by turning them
counterclockwise (both crossbars are
adjustable).
2. Slide the crossbar to the desired location.
3. Tighten the thumbwheels at both ends
of the crossbar by turning them
clockwise.
213
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Make sure to check that the thumbwheels
are tight each time you add or remove load
from the roof rack, and periodically while
traveling. Make sure that the load is secure
before traveling.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer or both,
to keep your loaded vehicle weight
within its design rating capability, with
or without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or
without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire
Label or Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight of the
vehicle including a full tank of fuel and
all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the weight of
your new vehicle when you picked it up
from your authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
214
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Payload - is the combined weight of
cargo and passengers that the vehicle
is carrying. The maximum payload for
your vehicle can be found on the Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED
WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR
XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The
payload listed on the Tire Label is the
maximum payload for the vehicle as built
by the assembly plant. If you install any
aftermarket or authorized-dealer
installed equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire Label in order to determine the
new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading capacity
of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E210944
E210945
215
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight - includes all weight
added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment.
When towing, trailer tongue load or king
pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the total
weight placed on each axle (front and
rear) including vehicle curb weight and
all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - is
the maximum allowable weight that can
be carried by a single axle (front or rear).
These numbers are shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position. The
total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.
216
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - is the
Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo, plus
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). It is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position. The
Gross Vehicle Weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating.
217
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Example only:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety Compliance
Certification Label vehicle weight
rating limits could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance, engine,
transmission and/or structural damage,
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
218
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E143819
GCW
GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) - is the
Gross Vehicle Weight plus the weight of
the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded
trailer, including all cargo and
passengers, that the vehicle can handle
without risking damage. (Important: The
towing vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight - is
the highest possible weight of a fully
loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It
assumes a vehicle with mandatory
options, driver and front passenger
weight (150 pounds [68 kilograms] each),
no cargo weight (internal or external)
and a tongue load of 10–15%
(conventional trailer) or king pin weight
of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer). Consult
an authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at an
authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin
Weight - refers to the amount of the
weight that a trailer pushes down on a
trailer hitch.
219
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Examples: For a 5000 pound (2268
kilogram) conventional trailer, multiply
5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper
tongue load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an 11500
pound (5216 kilogram) fifth wheel trailer,
multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a
proper king pin load range of 1725 to
2875 pounds (782 to 1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than
the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not
increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or
personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples
on how to calculate the available amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
220
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 -
495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 -
198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating specified for your vehicle on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-
type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower
speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving
a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and
people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and
placement of the load, hauling cargo
and people may raise the center of
gravity of the vehicle.
221
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the certification
label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of the
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Your vehicle may have electrical items,
such as fuses or relays, related to
towing. See the Fuses chapter.
Your vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you
cannot necessarily use all available
space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect
these components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered
between the left and right side trailer
tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the correct rise
or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the
trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in
another chapter of this manual. See
Load Limit (page 214).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
222
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature except
in situations where speed reduction may be
detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver
has significant trailer towing experience, and
can control trailer sway and maintain safe
operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple times,
gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED
appears in the information display. The first
thing to do is slow your vehicle down, then
pull safely to the side of the road and check
for proper tongue load and trailer load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page 212).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for
your vehicle configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Make sure to take into consideration
trailer frontal area. Do not exceed 36.5 feet²
(3.39 meters²) if your vehicle is equipped
with the standard towing package, or 60
feet² (5.57 meters²) if your vehicle is
equipped with the optional heavy duty
package.
Note: Exceeding this limitation may
significantly reduce the performance of your
towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low
aerodynamic drag and rounded front design
helps optimize performance and fuel
economy.
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the
gross combined weight by 2% per 1000 feet
(300 meters) starting at the 1000 foot (300
meter) elevation point.
223
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Note: Certain states require electric trailer
brakes for trailers over a specified weight.
Be sure to check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum trailer
weights listed may be limited to this specified
weight, as the vehicle’s electrical system
may not include the wiring connector needed
to activate electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the
maximum trailer weight is less than or equal
to the maximum trailer weight listed for your
vehicle configuration on the following chart.
To calculate the maximum loaded trailer
weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined weight
rating for your vehicle model and axle
ratio. See the following chart.
2. Subtract all of the following that apply to
your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight
• Hitch hardware weight, such as a
draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing
• Driver weight
• Passenger(s) weight
• Payload, cargo and luggage weight
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
3. This equals the maximum loaded trailer
weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load figures into the
payload for your vehicle. Reduce the total
payload by the final trailer tongue weight.
Consult an authorized dealer to determine
the maximum trailer weight allowed for your
vehicle if you are not sure.
Maximum GCWRTowing PackageVehicle Type
12300 lb (5579 kg)
Standard
Two-wheel drive (except L)
12600 lb (5715 kg)Two-wheel drive L
12500 lb (5669 kg)Four-wheel drive (except L)
224
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Maximum GCWRTowing PackageVehicle Type
12800 lb (5806 kg)Four-wheel drive L
15100 lb (6849 kg)
Optional Heavy Duty
Two-wheel drive (except L)
14900 lb (6758 kg)Two-wheel drive L
15100 lb (6849 kg)Four-wheel drive (except L)
14900 lb (6758 kg)Four-wheel drive L
225
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 214).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles
with a Trailer Towing Package and
7–Pin Connector)
E163167
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop lampGreen
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
Trailer Hitch Cover
Your vehicle is equipped with a removable
trailer hitch trim cover. To remove the trim
cover:
226
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
E208902
Loosen the two quarter-turn fasteners in the
bottom of the cover by turning them
counterclockwise. Pull the cover downward
to remove it. The fasteners remain attached
to the cover.
E208903
To reinstall the cover, insert the four plastic
tabs on top of the cover into the
corresponding slots, as shown in the
illustration and push the cover up into the
bumper trim.
Hold the cover against the bumper trim and
reinstall the two quarter-turn fasteners by
turning them clockwise.
Hitches
WARNING
The trailer hitch on this vehicle is part
of the vehicle rear crash safety
structure. Do not remove the trailer hitch.
Failure to follow this warning could
compromise vehicle crash structure and
increase the risk of injury in a rear end crash.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Integrated Hitch Rating
WARNING
Towing trailers beyond the maximum
tongue weight exceeds the limit of the
towing system and could result in vehicle
structural damage, loss of vehicle control
and personal injury.
227
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
The standard integrated hitch has two ratings
depending on mode of operation:
• Weight-carrying mode requires a draw
bar and hitch ball. The draw bar supports
all the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
• Weight-distributing mode requires an
aftermarket weight-distributing system,
which includes draw bar, hitch ball, spring
bars and snap-up brackets. This system
distributes the vertical tongue load of the
trailer between the truck and the trailer.
Maximum Tongue WeightMaximum Trailer WeightMode
600 lb (272 kg)6000 lb (2722 kg)Weight carrying
900 lb (408 kg)9000 lb (4082 kg)Weight distributing
Note: These are hitch ratings only. Actual
vehicle ratings are dependent on engine,
transmission and axle combinations.
Weight-distributing Hitch - Vehicles without
Automatic Leveling Suspension
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was
before attaching the trailer. Doing so will
defeat the function of the weight-distributing
hitch, which may cause unpredictable
handling, and could result in serious personal
injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
228
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the height
of your vehicle's front wheel opening on
the fender is approximately half the way
down from H2, toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose down
toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
Weight-distributing Hitch - Vehicles with
Automatic Leveling Suspension
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was
before attaching the trailer. Doing so will
defeat the function of the weight-distributing
hitch, which may cause unpredictable
handling, and could result in serious personal
injury.
Note: If you do not move the loaded vehicle
for approximately 12 hours, the leveling
system may bleed down to a lower height.
This can be especially apparent if you leave
a trailer attached to the parked vehicle for
long periods. You must drive your vehicle in
order to re-level the suspension.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Load the interior of the vehicle to a
weight similar to that which you intend
to carry when towing. This includes
things such as passenger weight and
cargo.
2. Drive the vehicle for approximately 2
miles (3 kilometers) to re-level the
suspension.
3. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
5. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
6. Make sure you securely attach and lock
the trailer tongue to the hitch.
7. Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
8. Drive the vehicle and trailer at 20–25
mph (32–40 km/h) for approximately 2
miles (3 kilometers) to re-level the
suspension.
229
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
9. Park your vehicle and trailer on a level
surface.
10. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
11. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
half the way down from H2, toward H1.
12. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
remove the trailer, adjust the ball height
accordingly and repeat Steps 5-11.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose down
toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your vehicle's
brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of
having a collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500
pounds (680 kilograms) when loaded.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system resulting
in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible for assistance in proper
trailer tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
230
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system may
turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed while towing may reduce
this tendency.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
Continuous Controlled Damping
Suspension (CCD Suspension), you can
select NORMAL or SPORT drive control
modes for better experience while towing
a trailer. See Information Displays (page
105).
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the gross
combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear
lubricant (if the axle is not already filled
with it). See Capacities and
Specifications (page 328).
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included
with vehicle.)
231
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
“temporary” spare tire is different in size
(diameter or width), tread-type (All-Season
or All-Terrain) or is from a different
manufacturer than the road tires on your
vehicle. Consult information on the tire label
or Safety Compliance label for limitations
when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 inches (15 centimeters) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the
rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear axle
lubricant, which is not normally checked or
changed unless a leak is suspected or other
axle repair is required.
TOWING POINTS
WARNINGS
Using recovery hooks is dangerous
and should only be done by a person
familiar with proper vehicle recovery safety
practices. Improper use of recovery hooks
may cause hook failure or separation from
the vehicle and could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNINGS
Always slowly remove the slack from
the recovery strap prior to pulling.
Failure to do so can introduce significantly
higher loads which can cause the recovery
hooks to break off, or the recovery strap to
fail which can cause serious injury or death.
Never link two straps together with a
clevis pin. These heavy metal objects
could become projectiles if the strap breaks
and can cause serious injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with
frame-mounted front recovery hooks. These
hooks should never have a load applied to
them greater than the gross vehicle weight
rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are secure
and capable of withstanding the applied
load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
232
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to three
times the gross vehicle weight of the
stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet draped
over the recovery strap to help absorb
the energy in the event the strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not loaded
heavier than its gross vehicle weight
rating specified on the certification label.
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice the
length of the recovery strap. This helps
avoid injury from the hazard of a recovery
hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle
lurching into their path.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or, if
you are a member of a roadside assistance
program, your roadside assistance service
provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt
towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other
means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel drive
vehicle towed with the front wheels on the
ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels
off the ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment.
233
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being towed.
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without
access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,
or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground,
regardless of the powertrain and
transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing
in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in position N. If
you cannot move the transmission into
N, you may need to override it. See
Transmission (page 171).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
234
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit
some unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the gears
early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
REDUCED ENGINE PERFORMANCE
WARNING
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and cause the
engine to shut down completely.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position, the
engine is overheating. See Gauges (page
99).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain. The
engine will continue to operate with limited
power for a short time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine will reduce. The
air conditioning will switch off and the engine
cooling fan will operate continually.
1. Reduce your speed gradually and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Switch the engine off immediately to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 269).
5. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving(When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back home).
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
235
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
There are also some things you may want to
avoid doing because they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the wheel hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the
pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats
that are firmly secured to retention posts so
that they cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
236
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
Always make sure that the floor mats
are properly attached to the retention
posts in the carpet that are supplied with
your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly
secured to both retention posts to make sure
mats do not shift out of position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to prevent them
from moving and interfering with the pedals
or the ability to control the vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on
top of vehicle carpeting surface and not
another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
WARNINGS
Check attachment of floor mats on a
regular basis. Always properly reinstall
and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.
Always make sure that objects cannot
fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can
become trapped under the pedals causing
a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment instructions
can potentially cause interference with pedal
operation causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
237
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
If you ever need help on the road, the Lincoln
Motor Company is there for you with
nationwide, 24-hours-a-day,
seven-days-a-week assistance.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000 mi
(112,654.08 km) (whichever comes first)
within the extended powertrain warranty
coverage period for subsequent owners.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
This complimentary Roadside Assistance
program is separate from the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and includes:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2.0 gal (7.5 L) of gasoline or 5.0 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.48 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (161 km) of
the disablement location or to the nearest
Lincoln dealer. If a client requests a tow
to a selling or preferred dealer that is
more than 100 mi (161 km) from the
disablement location, the client shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (161 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is not,
then the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States Lincoln vehicle clients who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100 mi (161 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Lincoln vehicle
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Ford Motor
Company will ask you to submit your original
receipts.
238
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian clients who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-387-9333.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation
administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered services
in Canada or the continental United States.
Coverage extends to vehicles that use public,
non-seasonal, annually traveled roadways.
Roadside Assistance coverage does not
extend to vehicles involved in cross-country
driving, logging, autocross and any other
form of off-road use. Well maintained roads
and surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
Supplier, and allow their representatives to
perform service as per the standard
operating procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by
road to the nearest authorized dealership,
transportation by rail or water may be
necessary. The program covers a tow to the
dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip.
For rail or water transportation, however,
contact your authorized dealer to confirm if
you are eligible for additional coverage
before you authorize or pay for the service.
Call Lincoln Roadside Assistance at
1-800-387-9333 for additional information.
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the United States coverage.
Please refer to your warranty information or
visit our website at www.lincolncanada.com
for information on Canadian services and
benefits.
Canadian clients who need to obtain
roadside information, call 1-800-387-9333 or
visit our website at www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will lose charge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the
fuel system be inspected by an authorized
dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel to
the engine. Not every impact will cause a
shutoff.
239
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision,
you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles
equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to switch
off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the engine
by pressing the brake pedal and the
START/STOP button, or switch on the
ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without pressing
the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the
fuel system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not
restart after your third attempt, contact an
authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide correct ventilation.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables with
insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic
transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with
an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
240
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components as
grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts.
To avoid reverse polarity connections, make
sure that you correctly identify the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals on both the
disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+) terminal of
your vehicle’s battery. High current may flow
through and cause damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the
battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
241
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle
battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
242
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made
using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.lincolnowner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
243
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies, please
contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford
in writing before pursuing remedies under
your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000
miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
244
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
245
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’ s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
246
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than
is recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without
proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the United
States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth
of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI),
America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,
please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
247
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations & Global Growth
Initiatives by emailing [email protected].
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’ s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S
LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, Incorporated using the contact
information listed previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
248
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htmWebsite
1–800–333–0510Phone
249
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
WARNINGS
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the power
distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the
engine compartment. It has high-current
fuses that protect your vehicle’s main
electrical systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the battery,
you need to reset some features. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 276).
E166589
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
250
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Rear washer relay.Relay1
Starter relay.Relay2
Blower motor relay.Relay3
Rear wiper relay.Relay4
Fuel pump relay.Relay5
Electronic cooling fan.Relay6
Rear window defroster.Relay7
Heated mirror relay.
Electronic cooling fan.Relay8
Run/start relay.Relay9
Power distribution box relay.Relay10
Power running boards.40A*11
Heated seats.
Run/start relay.40A*12
Starter relay.30A*13
Electronic cooling fan.50A*14
251
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
RH HID headlamp.20A*15
Electronic fan.50A*16
LH HID headlamp.20A*17
Trailer brake.30A*18
Power point (console).20A*19
Not used.—20
Trailer tow module.30A*21
Passenger power seat.30A*22
Air conditioner clutch relay.Relay23
Trailer tow park lamp relay.Relay24
Not used.—25
ALT sensor.10A**26
4x4 all wheel drive module.20A**27
Trailer tow park lamp relay.25A**28
Integrated wheel end solenoid.10A**29
Air conditioner clutch relay.10A**30
252
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Trailer tow back up lamp.15A**31
Blower motor relay.40A*32
110-volt AC power point.40A*33
Auxiliary blower motor.30A*34
Powertrain control module relay.50A*35
Power liftgate.30A*36
Not used.—37
Not used.—38
Trailer tow backup lamps relay.Relay39
Electronic fan 2 relay.Relay40
Powertrain control module keep-alive power.10A**41
Run/start relay.5A**42
Brake on/off switch.10A**43
Fuel pump relay.20A**44
Not used (spare).10A**45
Front/rear washer pump.15A**46
253
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Rear wiper motor.30A*47
Trailer tow module.40A*48
Not used.—49
Front wiper motor relay.30A*50
Rear window defroster and heated mirror relay.40A*51
Anti-lock brake system run/start feed.10A**52
Powertrain control module ISP.5A**53
Power steering.5A**54
Headlamp control module.15A**55
Passenger compartment fuse panel run/start feed.30A**56
Blower motor run/start.5A**57
Not used.—58
Heated mirrors.15A**59
Not used.—60
Not used.—61
Not used.—62
254
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Electronic fan.25A*63
Moonroof.30A*64
Auxiliary power point (instrument panel valance panel).20A*65
Auxiliary power point (rear of center console).20A*66
Front row climate controlled seats.40A*67
Anti-lock brake system valves.30A*68
Anti-lock brake system pump.60A*69
Third row power fold seat.30A*70
Auxiliary power point/cigar lighter.20A*71
Auxiliary power point (right rear quarter panel).20A*72
Rear seat climate module.20A*73
Driver power seat.30A*74
Vehicle power 1 – powertrain control module.25A**75
Vehicle power 2 – powertrain control module.20A**76
Vehicle power 4 – ignition coils.20A**77
Not used.—78
255
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Vehicle power 3 – powertrain control module.15A**79
Not used.—80
Not used.—81
Rain sensor.5A**82
Not used.—83
Not used.—84
Wiper motor relay.Relay85
*Cartridge fuses.
**Mini fuses.
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located under the
right-hand side of the instrument panel.
256
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
E205347
To remove the trim panel for access to the
fuse box, pull the panel toward you and
swing it out away from the side and remove
it. To reinstall it, line up the tabs with the
grooves on the panel, then push it shut.
257
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
E163102
The fuses are coded as follows:
258
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Driver window.30A1
Rear seat control.15A2
Multimedia gateway module.
Passenger window.30A3
Demand lamps.10A4
Amplifier.20A5
Rear electronic automatic temperature control.5A6
Power mirror.7.5A7
Driver seat memory switch.
Not used.—8
SYNC.10A9
Power lift gate.
Electric finish panel.
Display.
Run accessory relay.10A10
Passive entry/start module.10A11
Interior lighting.15A12
Puddle lamps.
259
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Right turn and stop/turn signals.15A13
Left turn and stop/turn signals.15A14
Reverse lamp.15A15
Center high mount stop lamp.
EC mirror.
Right front low beam.10A16
Left front low beam.10A17
Brake shift interlock/start button LED/keypad illumination.10A18
Third row power folding seat.
Passive entry touch start.
Subwoofer amplifier.20A19
THX amplifier.
Lock/unlock relays.20A20
Not used.—21
Horn.20A22
Steering wheel control module.15A23
Cluster.
Adjustable pedals/power adjustable column.15A24
Datalink.
260
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Liftgate release decklid.15A25
Liftglass release motor.
Push to start switch.5A26
Passive entry/start module.20A27
Ignition switch.15A28
Key inhibit switch.
Radio.20A29
GPS.
Front park lamps.15A30
Trailer brake on/off.5A31
Power vent.15A32
Rear windows.
Power inverter.
CCD suspension module.10A33
Rear park assist.10A34
Rear camera.
BLIS.
Heated seat.
Climate module.5A35
261
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
O/D switch.
Not used.—36
4X4 module.10A37
EC mirror.10A38
Moonroof.
DVD.
Left and right front high beams.15A39
Rear park/tail lamps.10A40
Restraints control module.7.5A41
Not used.—42
Not used.—43
Not used.—44
Not used (spare).5A45
Climate control.10A46
Not used.—47
Not used.—48
Not used.—49
262
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
You must replace a failed fuse with one
that has the specified amperage rating.
If you use a fuse with a higher amperage
rating, you may cause severe wire damage
and may start a fire.
E142430
A fuse may fail if electrical components in
the vehicle are not properly working. A
broken wire inside the fuse indicates a failed
fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
263
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
264
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E203008
1
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and locate
the secondary release lever under the
front of the hood on the left-hand side.
Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever toward the
center of your vehicle.
E189028
3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold
it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make sure
that it is closed properly and fully latched.
265
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
A
A
B D E F
C
GH
E166496
266
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 275).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 276).B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 268).C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 268).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 274).E.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 269).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 284).G.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 250).H.
267
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the
gearshift is in park (P).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from
engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine
oil level dipstick. See Under Hood
Overview (page 266).
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the
dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is between the lower
and upper holes, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the lower hole,
add enough oil to raise the level
within the lower and upper holes.
• Oil levels above the upper hole may
cause engine damage. Some oil must
be removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the oil level dipstick back into the oil
dipstick tube and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the
engine is running.
Note: Do not remove the engine oil level
dipstick when the engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC),
comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
268
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 328).
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use
a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
4. Wipe off any spilled oil.
5. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure
the oil level is not above the normal
operating range on the engine oil level
dipstick.
6. Install the engine oil level dipstick and
ensure it is fully seated.
7. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by
turning the filler cap clockwise until three
clicks are heard or until the cap is fully
seated.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
displays the following
message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
Action and descriptionMessage
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, spilling coolant on
hot engine parts can burn you.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
269
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure. Steam
and hot liquid can come out forcefully when
you loosen the cap slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine coolant
at the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 353).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration
should be tested with a refractometer such
as Robinair® Coolant and Battery
Refractometer 75240. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Your warranty may not
cover these damages.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. Use prediluted engine coolant
meeting the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 328).
The use of an incorrect coolant may harm
the engine or cooling system components
and may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System
Flush.
270
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
will escape as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the correct specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 328).
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant level
to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant as an approved recycling
process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of
in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% provides
improved freeze point protection. Engine
coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% provides
improved overheat protection. Engine
coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
271
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling
If you deplete the engine coolant supply,
fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before you incur
incremental component damage. The
fail-safe distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to the
red (hot) area and:
the coolant temperature warning
light will illuminate
the service engine soon indicator
will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• This will disable the air conditioning
system.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start your engine. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have
limited power, will not be able to maintain
WARNINGS
high-speed operation, and may completely
shut down without warning, potentially losing
engine power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may increase the
possibility of a crash resulting in serious
injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine will
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.
272
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
5. Re-start the engine and drive your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine Fluid Temperature Management (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not be able
to accelerate with full power until the fluid
temperatures reduce.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but because
of the added load, your vehicle’ s engine may
temporarily reach higher temperatures during
severe operating conditions such as
ascending a long or steep grade while
pulling a trailer in high temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine
coolant temperature gauge needle move
toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO
LOWER TEMP message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed
caused by reduced engine power. In order
to manage the engine fluid temperatures,
your vehicle may enter this mode if certain
high-temperature and high-load conditions
take place. The amount of speed reduction
depends on many factors such as vehicle
loading, towing, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no need
to pull off the road. You can continue to drive
your vehicle while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and
off during severe operating conditions to
protect overheating of the engine. When the
engine coolant temperature decreases to a
normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the
coolant temperature warning or service
engine soon messages appear in your
information display:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
P.
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the red (hot) area. After
several minutes, if the temperature does
not drop, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is normal, restart your
engine and continue.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, and
restart the engine. See Adding Engine
Coolant or How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
in this chapter for more information.
273
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
If required, have an authorized dealer check
and change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 353).
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission does
not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID CHECK (If
Equipped)
E170444
1. Clean the area around the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug.
3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level
should be within 0.20 in (5mm) from the
bottom of the hole.
4. Add fluid through the filler opening. Fill
to the bottom of the opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
328).
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid
could result in the loss of vehicle control,
serious personal injury or death.
274
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage or failure.
Failure to adhere to this warning could result
in the loss of vehicle control, serious
personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with plenty of
water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to add
fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating
range could compromise the performance
of the system. Have your vehicle checked
immediately.
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
328).
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 328).
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
275
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide correct ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the vent
caps, resulting in personal injury and damage
to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with
a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
This vehicle may be fitted with more
than one battery. Removing the battery
cables from only one battery does not
disconnect your vehicle electrical system.
Make sure you disconnect the battery cables
from all batteries when disconnecting power.
Failure to do so may cause serious personal
injury or property damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required, you
must use a recommended replacement
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery,
make sure you reinstall the battery cover or
shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
276
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer, some
control conditions are maintained by power
from the battery. When the battery is
disconnected or a new battery is installed,
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim
strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV)
must also relearn the ethanol content of the
fuel for optimum driveability and
performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. See Audio System
(page 340). Reset the power windows
bounce-back feature. See Windows and
Mirrors (page 93). Reset the radio station
presets. See Audio System (page 340).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to
completely relearn the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim
strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the battery
cables to maintain battery charge for quick
starting.
Battery Management System (If Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery drain
is detected, the system temporarily disables
some electrical systems to protect the
battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. These messages are only
for notification that an action is taking place,
and not intended to indicate an electrical
problem or that the battery requires
replacement.
277
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
After battery replacement, or in some cases
after charging the battery with an external
charger, the battery management system
requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to
relearn the battery state of charge. During
this time your vehicle must remain fully
locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state of
charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from
the glass.
278
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E205141
2
3
4
2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.
3. Press the wiper blade secondary locking
clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly
aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, contact an
authorized dealer to check and realign your
headlamps.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 feet (7.6 meters).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
279
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a 3.0
millimeter circle on the lens) to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
so no light hits the wall.
E167358
4. For halogen or LED headlamps: On the
wall or screen you will observe a light
pattern with a distinct horizontal edge
toward the right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, you will need
to adjust the beam so the edge is at the
same height as the horizontal reference
line.
E163806
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver
to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle
and is not adjustable.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNING
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal injury.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,
clean it with rubbing alcohol before installing
it.
HID Headlamp Bulbs
Your vehicle has high intensity discharge
lamps. These lamps operate at a high
voltage. Contact an authorized dealer.
280
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
LED Lamps
These lamps operate at a high voltage.
Contact an authorized dealer.
The following lamps are LED:
• Front parking lamps.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Daytime running lamps.
• Front direction indicators.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Brake and rear lamps.
• Reversing lamps
Central High-mounted Brake Lamp
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
E205572
2. Remove the retaining bolts from the lamp
assembly.
E205573
3. Remove the lamp and unclip the bulb
holder.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
License Plate Lamp Bulbs
E205571
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
281
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart
below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with
an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and
an “E” for Europe to ensure lamp
performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not
damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp
assembly warranty and will provide quality
bulb illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDFront direction indicator.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.
HIDHIDHeadlamp low beam.
HIDHIDHeadlamp high beam.
LEDLEDFront side marker lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
LEDLEDWelcome lighting lamps.
LEDLEDRear lamp, brake lamp and rear direction indicator.
--W5WCentral high mounted brake lamp.
282
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDReversing lamps.
--168License plate lamp.
HID and LED lamps are not serviceable. Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
3.5194Glove compartment lamp.
--A6224PFVanity mirror lamp.
61600XBMap lamp.
61600XBSecond row lamp.
12211-2XBRear dome lamp.
LED lamps are not serviceable. Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.
283
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not start
your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is
running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 329).
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
353).
E163755
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor electrical
connector on the air outlet tube.
Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector.
E163756
2. Reposition the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from below
for clarity), squeeze the connector and
pull it off of the air outlet tube.
E163757
3. Clean the area from around the air tube
to the air cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system. Next,
loosen the bolt on the air tube clamp so
the clamp is no longer snug to the air
tube. It is not necessary to completely
remove the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air cleaner
housing.
284
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E163758
5. Release the three clamps that secure the
cover to the air filter housing. Push the
air filter cover toward the center of the
vehicle and up slightly to release it.
6. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
7. Install the new air filter element.
E163759
8. Replace the air filter housing cover and
secure all the clamps. Be careful not to
crimp the filter element edges between
the air filter housing and cover and
ensure that you properly align the tabs
on the edge into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air filter housing
and tighten the air-tube clamp bolt
snugly. Do not over tighten air-tube
clamp bolt.
E163760
10. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet tube.
Make sure the locking tab on the
connector is in the locked position
(connector shown from below for
clarity).
285
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
• Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
• Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
(ZC-15)
• Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
• Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
• Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
• Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
• Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A,
B, D or F)]
• Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B2)
• Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
• Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-56)
• Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.
only) (ZC-14)
• Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
• Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when is hot to
the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’ s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
286
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended cleaners
can result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure
sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes and
graphics. This can damage them and cause
the edges to peel away from the vehicle
surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
287
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
288
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’ s safety belts, as
these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such
products could contaminate the side airbag
system and affect performance of the side
airbag in a collision.
Note: Follow the same procedure for
cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather
interior. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
291).
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
For grease or tar stains:
• Spot clean the area with Motorcraft Spot
and Stain Remover (Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner in Canada).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or
the ring will set.
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior (If Equipped)
Note: Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric is
made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Lincoln Black Label or Presidential
vehicles may have Alcantara microfiber cloth
fabric on the seats, headliner, floor mats and
door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning Alcantara microfiber
cloth, refer to the following chart:
289
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.
Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm
water because it makes these substances coagulate.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine.
Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, treat with lemon juice and
then rinse.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola and tea.
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice
cream or mustard.
Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar.
Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.Dye transfer and all other stains.
290
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or strong
detergents when cleaning the steering
wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
291).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
291
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’ s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or
high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply
using manufacturer's instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits
of dirt and brake dust accumulation.
292
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of
water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
293
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
294
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your vehicle.
If you change the diameter of the tires from
that fitted at the factory, the speedometer
may not display the correct speed. Take your
vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer to have
the system reprogrammed. If you intend to
change the size of the wheels from that fitted
by the manufacturer, you can check the
suitability with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 298).
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can also
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door last post; next to the
driver’s seating position).
Ford strongly recommends maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the way
your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least once
per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination (if equipped).
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury
or death from a rollover or other crash you
must avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for the
conditions, keep tires inflated to Ford
recommended pressures, never overload or
improperly load your vehicle, and make sure
every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants
must wear seat belts and children/infants
must use appropriate restraints to minimize
the risk of injury or ejection.
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel drive
vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
295
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to reduce
the risk of an accident or serious injury.
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel drive
vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive
(when selected) has the ability to use all four
wheels to power itself. This increases traction
which may enable you to safely drive over
terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through
a transfer case or power transfer unit.
Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you to select
different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel Drive
(page 176). For information on transfer case
maintenance, See Maintenance (page 264).
You should become thoroughly familiar with
this information before you operate your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the initial
shift from two-wheel to four-wheel drive
while the vehicle is moving can cause a
momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not cause
for concern.
For four-wheel drive vehicles, a spare tire of
a different size other than the tire provided
should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire
size (other than the spare tire provided) or
major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the four-wheel
drive system to stop functioning and default
to front-wheel drive. See Using Four-Wheel
Drive (page 176).
296
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
How your vehicle differs from other
vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few noticeable
ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components. All
other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
297
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks
often will have a higher center of gravity and
a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as
the government has written it.
298
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half (1 ½) times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’ s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’ s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the original
equipment tire sizes, recommended
inflation pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire size
and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
299
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-Metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) or 36 psi (2.5 bar) depending
on tire size and for Metric 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier
maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle being
driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation pressure: The
cold inflation pressure found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
300
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to
186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
301
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
mph ( km/h)Letter rating
81 (130)M
87 (140)N
99 (159)Q
106 (171)R
112 (180)S
118 (190)T
124 (200)U
130 (210)H
149 (240)V
mph ( km/h)Letter rating
168 (270)W
186 (299)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number:
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
302
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label located
on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's
door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear 1½ times
as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the
vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
303
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires.
These differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual; defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single; defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires.
These differences are described below:
304
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire
inflation pressure by tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door.
See Load Carrying (page 212).
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check pressure of all
tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use
of a digital or dial-type tire pressure
gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear. Under-inflation or
over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failures and may result
in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting
in heat buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in unnecessary
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
305
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. Failure to follow the
tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to
change the ride characteristics of the
vehicle. If you do not maintain the
inflation pressure at the levels specified
by Ford, your vehicle may experience a
condition known as shimmy. Shimmy is
a severe vibration and oscillation in the
steering wheel after the vehicle travels
over a bump or dip in the road that does
not dampen out by itself. Shimmy may
result from significant under-inflation of
the tires, improper tires (load range, size,
or type), or vehicle modifications such
as lift-kits. In the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should slowly
reduce speed by either lifting off the
accelerator pedal or lightly applying the
brakes. The shimmy will cease as the
vehicle speed decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire.
This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes
occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop
can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi
(7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your
tire pressures frequently and adjust
them to the proper pressure which can
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning
they are not hot from driving even a
mile.
306
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are checking tire pressure
when the tire is hot, (for example, driven
more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never
bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire
at or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to
get air for your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the
appropriate air pressure when you get
to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go up
as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge
onto the valve and measure the
pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air
by pressing on the metal stem in the
center of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. For T type mini-spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare tires,
see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at the higher of the
front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure
there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the
tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve stems
for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit
air leakage and repair or replace the tire
and replace the valve stem. Inspect the
tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired
or replaced. For your safety, tires that
are damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.
307
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters), tires
must be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear
bars, which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread is
worn down to one sixteenth of an inch
(2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall). If damage is observed or
suspected have the tire inspected by a
tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time depending
on many factors such as weather,
storage conditions, and conditions of
use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the
tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after
six years regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process and may
require tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when
you replace the road tires or after six
years due to aging even if it has not
been used.
308
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended
tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or the Tire Label. If
this information is not found on these
labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
WARNINGS
non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case or power transfer unit
failure. If you have questions regarding
tire replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
To reduce the risk of serious injury,
when mounting replacement tires
and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following precautions must
be taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
309
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.6 m)
away from the wheel and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or
other tire service professional should do
the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a
remote air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.6 m)
away from the wheel and tire assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels are not designed to be used
in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire
pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, the system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, do not rapidly spin
the tires; spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A tire can
explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNINGS
Do not spin the wheels at over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
310
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re driving, the
wheels may be out of alignment. Have
an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension
may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Tire Rotation
WARNING
If the tire label shows different tire
pressures for the front and rear
tires and the vehicle is equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system, then
the settings for the system sensors need
to be updated. Always perform the
system reset procedure after tire
rotation. If the system is not reset, it may
not provide a low tire pressure warning
when necessary. See the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure in
this chapter.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
it is intended for temporary use only and
should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval (as indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help your tires
wear more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front tires at
left of diagram)
311
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E142548
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size, load
index, speed rating as those originally
provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need to
use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications)
be used, as cables may chip aluminum
wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only cable type chains or chains
offered by Ford/Lincoln as an accessory
or equivalent. Other conventional link
type chains may contact and cause
damage to the vehicle's wheel house
and/or body.
• Do not install chains on the front tires as
this may interfere with suspension
components.
• Only certain snow cables or chains have
been approved by Ford/Lincoln as safe
for use on your vehicle with the following
tires: 265/70R17 and 275/65R18.
312
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• You should install snow cables or chains
that have been rated as SAE Class S.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the
chains do not touch any wiring, brake
lines, or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h) or less
if recommended by the chain
manufacturer while using snow chains.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does not
work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no
longer needed. Do not use tire chains on
dry roads.
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body to
tire dimension restrictions. The snow
chains or cables must be mounted in
pairs on the rear tires only.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
Ford/Lincoln authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system is
not a substitute for manually checking
the tire pressure. The tire pressure should
be checked periodically (at least monthly)
using a tire pressure gauge. Failure to
properly maintain your tire pressure could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’ s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
313
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference.
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
314
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly
low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires
are under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
315
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire pressure monitoring system
malfunction
316
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures, the system
must be retrained following every tire rotation. See Tire Care
(page 298).
Tire rotation without sensor training
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire pressure monitoring system
malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from
a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as being
significantly lower than the recommended
inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure.
317
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the road
tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully
drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate
all the tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
WARNING
To determine the required pressure(s)
for your vehicle, see the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating position), or
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver's door.
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation on vehicles that require
different recommended tire pressures in the
front tires as compared to the rear tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle's load carrying
capability, some vehicles require different
recommended tire pressures in the front tires
as compared to the rear tires. The tire
pressure monitoring system equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
low tire pressure warning light at two
different pressures; one for the front tires
and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide
consistent performance and maximum tire
life, the tire pressure monitoring system
needs to know when the tires are rotated to
determine which set of tires are on the front
and which are on the rear. With this
information, the system can detect and
properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
• To reduce the chances of interference
from another vehicle, perform the system
reset procedure at least three feet (one
meter) away from another Ford Motor
Company vehicle undergoing the system
reset procedure at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or the
system will time-out and the entire
procedure will have to be repeated on
all four wheels.
• A double horn will sound indicating the
need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
Read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32
km/h) for at least two minutes, then park
in a safe location where you can easily
get to all four tires and have access to
an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position with
the engine off.
318
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off three
times. You must accomplish this within
10 seconds. If the reset mode has been
entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the system indicator will flash and
a message is shown in the information
display. If this does not occur, please try
again starting at Step 2. If after repeated
attempts to enter the reset mode, the
horn does not sound, the system
indicator does not flash and no message
is shown in the information display, seek
service from your authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring system
sensors in the tires using the following
system reset sequence starting with the
left front tire in the following clockwise
order: Left front (driver's side front tire),
Right front (passenger's side front tire),
Right rear (passenger's side rear tire), Left
rear (driver's side rear tire).
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds. Note:
The single horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position.
If a double horn is heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful, and you
must repeat it.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn
sounds for the last tire trained (driver's
side rear tire), the system indicator stops
flashing, and a message is shown in the
information display.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
beeps are heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful and you must repeat
it. If after repeating the procedure and
two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance
from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position) or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver's door.
319
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used.
The tire pressure monitoring system sensor
and valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized dealer after use
of the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 313).
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply
the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the system
sensors See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 313). Replace the spare tire
with a road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the system
sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY
320
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
just forward of the rear bumper. The jack,
jack handle and lug wrench are located in
the following locations:
321
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
LocationItem
Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumperSpare tire
Under the access panel located in the floor compartment behind the
rear seat
Jack tools
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off the
ground, the transmission alone will not
prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping
off the jack.
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park (P), set
the parking brake and block (in both
directions) the wheel that is diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the vehicle)
to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack. If the vehicle
slips off the jack, you or someone else could
be seriously injured.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating the
jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one provided
as original equipment with your vehicle,
make sure the jack capacity is adequate for
the vehicle weight, including any vehicle
cargo or modifications.
WARNINGS
Disable the power running boards
before jacking, lifting, or placing any
object under the vehicle. Never place your
hand between the power running board and
the vehicle as extended power running
boards will retract when the doors are
closed. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
when using the spare tire carrier could
cause loss of the wheel and tire and lead to
personal injury: Only use the spare tire carrier
to stow the tire and wheel combination
specified on the Tire Label or Safety
Compliance Certification Label on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver door. Other tire and
wheel combinations could cause the carrier
to fail if it does not fit securely or is too
322
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
heavy. Do not use impact tools or power
tools operating over 200 RPM, which may
cause winch malfunction and prevent a
secure fit. Override the winch at least three
times (there will be an audible click each
time) to ensure a tight secure fit of the wheel
and tire.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Park on a level surface, activate the hazard
flashers and set the parking brake. Then,
place the transmission in park (P) and turn
the engine off.
Removing the Jack and Tools
Note: Pay close attention to the orientation
of the bag, because it will have to be
reinstalled after changing the tire.
1. Open the liftgate, then locate the access
panel on the floor behind the third row
seat. Unlatch and remove the panel.
E208640
2. Remove the jack and tools assembly tray
from the compartment by turning the
wing-nut counterclockwise. Remove the
bag from the jack and tools assembly tray
by loosening the strap.
3. Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench, jack
extension and handle from the plastic
tray.
4. Remove the hack from the tray assembly.
Removing the Spare Tire
1. Remove the jack handle and winch
extension from the tray and assemble
them.
2. Open the spare tire winch access plug
at the bottom of the compartment for the
jack and tools tray.
3. Insert the winch extension tool assembly
through the access hole in the floor and
engage the winch.
E208655
4. To remove the spare tire, turn the handle
counterclockwise until the tire is lowered
to the ground and the cable is slightly
slack.
5. Slide the retainer through the center of
the spare tire wheel and remove the
spare tire.
323
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Jacking the Vehicle
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid
damaging your vehicle.
E208656
Front jacking point
E208657
Rear jacking point
E175447
1. With the vehicle on level ground, block
both sides of the wheel diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the wheel being changed. Do
not jack the vehicle on a hill or incline.
2. Obtain the spare tire and jack tools from
their storage locations.
3. Use the tip of the jack handle to remove
any wheel trim.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off the
ground.
5. Position the jack according to the jack
locator arrows found on the frame and
turn the jack handle and extension tool
assembly clockwise.
6. Raise the vehicle to provide sufficient
ground clearance when installing the
spare tire, about 1/4 inch (6 millimeters).
7. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
324
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward.
2. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten
the lug nuts until the wheel has been
lowered.
3. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
E166719
1
3
5
4
6
2
4. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown. See Technical
Specifications (page 326).
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear
of the vehicle, with the valve stem side
facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. If equipped, you may
have to remove the wheel center cap
prior to pushing the retainer through the
center of the wheel. To remove the
center cap, press it off with the jack tool
from the inner side of the wheel. Pull on
the cable to align the components at the
end of the cable.
3. Assemble the jack handle and winch
extension, then insert the winch
extension through the access hole
behind the third row seat and engage
the winch.
4. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the
tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The wrench will
become harder to turn and the spare tire
winch will rachet or slip when the tire is
raised to maximum tightness. A clicking
sound will be heard from the winch
indicating that the tire is properly stowed.
5. Disassembly the jack tool and winch
extension and snap them back into the
tool tray.
6. Reinstall the jack bag properly around
the jack and tool assembly tray, making
sure the strap is fastened.
7. Close the access hole with the rubber
plug.
8. Reinstall the tray into the vehicle and
secure it with the wing nut.
325
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the
hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at
the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss
of control.
lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a
flat tire, wheel removal).
326
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
327
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
3.5L EcoboostEngine
214Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
10.0:1Compression ratio
0.030 in (0.75 mm) - 0.033 in (0.85 mm)Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
E167467
328
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-750Battery
SP-534Spark plugs
WW-2234Windshield wiper blade
WW-1612Rear window wiper blade
BL3Z-7A098-ATransmission filter
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet
or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 353).
329
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
330
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The following
table shows the transmission code along
with the transmission description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6R80E
331
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
18.5 qt (17.5 L)Engine coolant (Base radiator with auxiliary rear heat)
18.0 qt (17 L)Engine coolant (Heavy duty trailer towing with auxiliary rear heat)
Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid reservoir
1
Brake fluid
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle
4.5 pt (2.1 L)
2
Rear axle
13.1 qt (12.4 L)
3
Automatic transmission fluid
1.6 qt (1.5 L) - 1.8 qt (1.7 L)Transfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Electronic Shift On the Fly)
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Torque On Demand)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
332
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
28.0 gal (106 L)Fuel tank
33.5 gal (126.8 L)Fuel tank (Navigator L)
44 oz (1.25 kg)A/C refrigerant
40 oz (1.13 kg)A/C refrigerant (Navigator L)
7.1 fl oz (210 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1
Reference the reservoir cap for proper fluid.
2
The rear axle is filled with synthetic rear axle lubricant, and it is considered lubricated for life. Do not check or change the lubricant unless
you suspect a leak or submerge the axle in water. Contact an authorized dealer.
3
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
333
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
334
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A1Brake fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-1-C
WSS-M6C65-A1Brake fluid (Canada):
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
CPM-1-C
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid (U.S., Canada and Mexico):
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C942-AFront axle fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 75W-85 Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL
335
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 75W-85 Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Electronic Shift On the Fly) (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
XL-12
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Electronic Shift On the Fly) (Canada):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
CXL-12
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Torque On Demand) (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Torque On Demand) (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSB-M8B16-A2Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSB-M8B16-A2Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
336
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
CRCSL3151ESBMulti-purpose grease:
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
337
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
338
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 3 or DOT
4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake
Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A1
or WSS-M6C65-A2. Please refer to the brake
reservoir cap for the proper brake fluid. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
339
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
340
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and
folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA
track mode (system default) and MP3 and
WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3 and
WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3
or WMA file extension) from T001 to a
maximum of T255. The maximum number
of playable MP3 and WMA files may be
less depending on the structure of the
CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all
MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted
by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and
all folders containing MP3 and WMA files,
from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253
T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how the
system reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present (files with
extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only
files with the MP3 and WMA extension are
played; other files are ignored by the system.
This enables you to use the same MP3 and
WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your
in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of
being in a specific folder). In folder mode,
the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
341
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Note: The touchscreen system controls most
of the audio features. See SYNC
Supplement.
A B
CDE
F
E171512
342
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
CD slot: Insert a CD.A
Eject: Press the control to eject a CD.B
TUNE: Turn the control to search manually through the radio frequency band. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, the system selects the previous or next channel. If you select a specific category (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.),
turn the TUNE control to find the previous or next channel in the selected category.
C
Seek/Fast Forward/Reverse: Press the control to go to the previous or next track or available radio station. Press and hold to either
reverse or fast forward through the current track or to quickly reverse or advance through the radio bands in individual increments.
D
Volume: Turn the control to adjust the volume level on your system.E
Power: Press the control to switch the audio system on and off.F
Rear Seat Audio Controls
E182082
343
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
VOL: Adjust radio volume.A
MEDIA: Scroll through available audio system modes.B
Rear audio display: See displayed time, radio frequency, Sirius radio channel or CD track.C
CLOCK: Press to display the current time in 12-hour format. The time displays for a few seconds or you can press the CLOCK button
again to switch immediately back to the last media state.
D
SEEK: Select the next or previous stored radio frequency station, Sirius radio channel or CD track.E
SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment
satellite radio channels. For more information
and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
344
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts a
variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming. Your
factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system
includes hardware and a limited subscription
term, which begins on the date of sale or
lease of your vehicle. See an authorized
dealer for availability.
345
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a complete list
of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and other
features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in
the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This message should
disappear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to
produce audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not clear shortly, or with
an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or choose another
preset.
The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe
to the channel, or tune to another channel.
Your subscription does not include this
channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the SIRIUS satellite or
SIRIUS tower to your vehicle antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The process may take up
to three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating…
346
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
ActionConditionMessage
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or
Skip function on that station.
All the channels in the selected category are
either skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the channels available
for your vehicle.
Subscription Updated
MEDIA HUB
The media hub may be located on the
instrument panel or center console.
E207805
See your SYNC information.
347
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit our
online store at:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Lincoln.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.LincolnCanada.com
Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Lincoln Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
Lincoln accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
• Side window deflectors.
• Splash guards.
Interior Style
• Floor mats.
• Rear seat entertainment system*.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup or coin holder.
• Cargo organization and management.
• Roof rack and carriers*.
• SUV camping tent*.
• Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
Peace of Mind
• Bumper protector.
• Car cover*.
• Cargo area protector.
• Cargo security shade.
• Vehicle security.
• Wheel locks.
*Lincoln Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the accessory
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
348
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Ask an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulations and should be installed only
by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did not
design them specifically for automotive
use.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
349
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A
LINCOLN EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Lincoln Extended Service Plan.
It is the only extended service plan backed
by Lincoln Motor Company, and provides
peace of mind protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Lincoln ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor
– can easily exceed the price of your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan. With Lincoln ESP,
you minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four Extended Service Plans with
different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1000 covered
components, this plan is so complete that
we generally only discuss what’s not
covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Lincoln and Ford dealers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico. It is
the only extended service plan authorized
and backed by Lincoln Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
350
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage to
the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle was
properly maintained with Lincoln ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Lincoln Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and select items
that routinely wear out. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
affording your vehicle maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers and struts.
• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Engine belts.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable,
no interest, no fee payment program allowing
you all the security and benefits Lincoln ESP
has to offer while paying over time. You are
pre-approved with no credit checks, no
hassles! To learn more, call our Lincoln ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Extended Service
Plan. Lincoln Extended Service Plan is the
only service contract backed by Lincoln
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Lincoln
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
351
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
There are several Lincoln Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is
tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Extended Service Plan that is right
for you.
352
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 328).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement
Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
353
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles (800
kilometers) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 269).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or 5000
miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10000
miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
354
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Make sure to change your vehicle’ s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
355
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every six months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
356
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
357
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
358
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
359
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items
1
Replace engine air filter.
Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
360
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3,000 mi
(4,800 km) of the message appearing in the
information display prompting you to change
your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25,000 mi
(40,000 km)). Perform the engine air filter
replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints (if equipped with grease fittings).Inspect frequently, service
as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
361
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
362
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Off-road operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if non-sealed bearings are used (Two-wheel drive
vehicles).
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
Normal Vehicle Axle Maintenance
Rear axles and power take-off units with
synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped
with Ford-design axles are lubricated for life;
do not check or change fluid unless a leak
is suspected, service is required or the
assembly has been submerged in water.
During long periods of trailer towing with
363
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
outside temperatures above 70°F (21°C) and
at wide-open throttle for long periods above
45 mph (72 km/h), change non-synthetic rear
axle fluid every 3,000 mi (4,800 km) or three
months, whichever comes first. This interval
can be waived if the axle is filled with
75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number
F1TZ-19580-B, or equivalent. Add friction
modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent
for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear axles.
Axle Maintenance
Change the axle fluid anytime an axle is
submerged in water.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the normal oil change interval is 3,000 mi
(4,800 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1,800 mi (2,900 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and replacement
of the engine air filter.
364
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
365
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
366
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
367
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
368
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
369
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
370
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
371
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
372
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
373
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
374
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
375
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
376
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
377
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
378
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
379
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
380
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
381
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
382
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
383
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
384
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have
acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that include
software licensed or owned by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software
products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY
origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE")
are protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICES and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process. It is your
responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the
system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
translate, disassemble or attempt to
discover any source code or underlying
ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE
nor permit others to reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
385
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICES, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third
party software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components".)
SOFTWARE updates may cause you to
incur additional charges from your
wireless service provider. If FORD
MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide
or make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms
are provided along with the
Supplemental Components, then the
terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD
386
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
387
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The third
party sites are not under the control of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
affiliates nor its designated agent are
responsible for (i) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety and
you agree to assume any risk associated
with the use of the DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICES as a replacement copy for the
existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any
additional EULA terms accompanying the
upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials accompanying
the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which
may be accessed through use of the
SOFTWARE is the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by
applicable copyright or other intellectual
property laws and treaties. This EULA grants
you no rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and
third party software and service providers
and suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
388
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICES product
support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following
precautions found in the Owner Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious
injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system may
be accomplished using voice commands.
Using voice commands while driving
helps you to operate the system without
removing your hands from the wheel or
eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic
and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could cause an accident.
389
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can distract
your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious injury. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations.
Any such feature is not a substitute for
your personal judgment. Any route
suggestions made by this system should
never replace any local traffic regulations
or your personal judgment or knowledge
of safe driving practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow
the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always use
good judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals and
clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation
features.
390
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
391
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving
an automobile or other vehicle in
violation of applicable law or otherwise
driving in an unsafe manner presents a
significant risk of distracted driving and
should not be attempted under any
circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE
at excessive volume poses a significant
risk of hearing damage and should not
be attempted under any
circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may
not be compatible with new or different
versions of an operating system, third
party software, or third party services,
and the SOFTWARE may potentially
cause a critical failure of an operating
system, third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software used
with the SOFTWARE (i) may charge an
additional fee for access, (ii) may not
work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,
or error free, (iii) may change streaming
formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may
contain adult, profane or offensive
content; and (v) may contain inaccurate,
false or misleading traffic, weather,
financial or safety information or other
content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider (WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference only,
are not warranted in any way and should
not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in Section
(a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS
AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL
392
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE
GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO
YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND
IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION
INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO
THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY
CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS
SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET,
THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL
CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan govern
this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE
may also be subject to other local, state,
national, or international laws. Any
litigation arising out of or related to this
EULA shall be brought and maintained
exclusively in a court of the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County or in
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any
dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A
DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute
means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed
above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including
its price) or this EULA, whether in contract,
warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance,
or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the party
giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,
and the relief requested. You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve
any dispute through informal negotiation
within 60 days from the date the Notice of
Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY may commence
arbitration.
393
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
(c) Small claims court. You may also litigate
any dispute in small claims court in your
county of residence or FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S principal place of business, if
the dispute meets all requirements to be
heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not
You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve the
dispute will be conducted exclusively by
binding arbitration. You are giving up the
right to litigate (or participate in as a party or
class member) all disputes in court before a
judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be
resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose
decision will be final except for a limited right
of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act.
Any court with jurisdiction over the parties
may enforce the arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to
resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum
will be conducted solely on an individual
basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute
heard as a class action, as a private attorney
general action, or in any other proceeding
in which any party acts or proposes to act in
a representative capacity. No arbitration or
proceeding will be combined with another
without the prior written consent of all parties
to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration
will be conducted by the American
Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an
individual and use the SOFTWARE for
personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the
dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not
You are an individual or how You use the
SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary
Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes
will also apply. To commence arbitration,
submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules
Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You
may request a telephonic or in-person
hearing by following the AAA rules. In a
dispute involving $10,000 or less, any
hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an
in-person hearing instead. For more
information, see adr.org or call
1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence
arbitration only in your county of residence
or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal
place of business. The arbitrator may award
the same damages to You individually as a
court could. The arbitrator may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only to You
individually, and only to the extent required
to satisfy Your individual claim. Arbitration
fees and incentives.
• i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly
reimburse your filing fees and pay the
AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement offer
made before the arbitrator was appointed
(“last written offer”), your dispute goes
all the way to an arbitrator’s decision
(called an “award”), and the arbitrator
awards you more than the last written
offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give
394
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
you three incentives: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’ s fees, if any; and (3)
reimburse any expenses (including expert
witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating,
preparing, and pursuing your claim in
arbitration. The arbitrator will determine
the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.
The AAA rules will govern payment of
filing fees and the AAA’ s and arbitrator’ s
fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any
arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or
arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your
filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY
commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and
arbitrator’ s fees and expenses. It will not
seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from
you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses
are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within
one year. To the extent permitted by law,
any claim or dispute under this EULA to
which this Section applies must be filed
within one year in small claims court (Section
c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year
period begins when the claim or dispute first
could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is
not filed within one year, it is permanently
barred.
(i) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts
will be severed and proceed in a court of
law, with the remaining parts proceeding in
arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be severed
with the remainder of Section e remaining in
full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this
Agreement and the privacy policy at any
time, with or http://www.telenav.com from
time to time to review the then current
version of this Agreement and of the privacy
policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the TeleNav
Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive
safely;
395
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by
the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the TeleNav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav
Software, to provide TeleNav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby
grants to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or
structure of the TeleNav Software without
the prior express written consent of
TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its
suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d) distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the
TeleNav Software to others, except as
part of your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
i. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or
396
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)
lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will
TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or
agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
TeleNav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely
on the TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being
or survival of you or others is dependent
on the accuracy of navigation, as the
maps or functionality of the TeleNav
Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in
more remote geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE)
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT
INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
397
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software
shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator
and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of
Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator
shall apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction.
Note that there is no judge or jury in an
arbitration proceeding and the decision
of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
both parties. You expressly agree to
waive your right to a jury trial. This
Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its
conflict of law provisions. To the extent
judicial action is necessary in connection
with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav
and you agree to submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment
or transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the TeleNav
Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
398
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent
to receive from TeleNav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, "Notices") electronically.
TeleNav may provide such Notices by
posting them on TeleNav's Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the
TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party's right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words "without
limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors::
399
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to
the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph,
you may not use this Data (a) with any
products, systems, or applications installed
or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real
time route guidance, fleet management or
similar applications; or (b) with or in
communication with any positioning devices
or any mobile or wireless-connected
electronic or computer devices, including
without limitation cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
400
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries do
not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered by
the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all
written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
401
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used], without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided
to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being
acquired by or on behalf of the United States
government or any other entity seeking or
applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government,
this Data is a “commercial item” as that term
is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these End-User
Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-
User Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;
6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;
6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other
patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
402
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device. This device may contain
content belonging to Gracenote's providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein
with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content
providers shall be entitled to all of the
benefits and protections set forth herein that
are available to Gracenote. You agree that
you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
(except in a Tag associated with a music file)
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music
file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE
403
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
404
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive.......................................176
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................125
About This Manual............................................7
Protecting the Environment..................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................184
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................184
Accessories....................................................348
Exterior Style........................................................348
Interior Style.........................................................348
Lifestyle.................................................................348
Peace of Mind.....................................................348
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....12
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................90
Adjusting the Headlamps...........................279
Horizontal Aim Adjustment..............................280
Vertical Aim Adjustment...................................279
Adjusting the Pedals......................................83
Adjusting the Steering Wheel......................77
Easy Entry and Exit Feature................................77
End of Travel Position...........................................77
Memory Feature....................................................77
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps..................................90
Airbag Disposal...............................................48
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................125
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter..............284
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm...........................................74
Ambient Lighting............................................92
Anti-Theft Alarm..............................................74
Arming the Alarm..................................................74
Disarming the Alarm.............................................74
Appendices....................................................385
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............104
Direction Indicator Chime.................................104
Headlamps On Warning Chime.......................104
Key in Ignition Warning Chime.........................104
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................104
Audio Control...................................................78
Media.......................................................................80
Seek, Next or Previous........................................80
Type One.................................................................79
Type Two.................................................................80
Audio System................................................340
General Information...........................................340
Audio Unit........................................................341
Rear Seat Audio Controls.................................343
Autolamps.........................................................88
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........89
Automatic Climate Control.........................125
Automatic Transmission................................171
Brake-Shift Interlock...........................................174
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................175
Selector Lever Positions.....................................171
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission.....................................................173
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................274
Autowipers.......................................................84
Auxiliary Power Points.................................153
110 Volt AC Power Point.....................................153
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................153
Locations...............................................................153
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.......................276
405
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Blind Spot Information System.................202
Switching the System Off and On..................204
System Errors......................................................204
Using the System...............................................202
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............264
Booster Seats..................................................26
Types of Booster Seats.......................................26
Brake Fluid Check........................................274
Brakes..............................................................184
General Information............................................184
Breaking-In.....................................................235
Bulb Specification Chart.............................282
C
California Proposition 65................................11
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™....................................................332
Specifications......................................................334
Capacities and Specifications...................328
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................286
Center Console.............................................155
Changing a Bulb...........................................280
Central High-mounted Brake Lamp...............281
HID Headlamp Bulbs.........................................280
LED Lamps............................................................281
License Plate Lamp Bulbs.................................281
Changing a Fuse..........................................263
Fuses.....................................................................263
Changing a Road Wheel............................320
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................320
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools.............321
Tire Change Procedure....................................322
Changing the 12V Battery..........................276
Battery Management System..........................277
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................284
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................278
Checking MyKey System Status.................58
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................278
Childminder Mirror.........................................95
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................39
Child Restraint Positioning...........................29
Child Safety.......................................................16
General Information..............................................16
Child Safety Locks..........................................30
Cleaning Leather Seats...............................291
Cleaning Products.......................................286
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................292
Cleaning the Engine....................................288
Cleaning the Exterior..................................286
Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................287
Exterior Plastic Parts..........................................287
Stripes or Graphics.............................................287
Underbody...........................................................287
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens............................291
Cleaning the Interior...................................289
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior..............................................................289
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................288
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56
Climate Control..............................................125
Climate Controlled Seats............................145
Cooled Seats........................................................146
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................269
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........47
Creating a MyKey...........................................55
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................55
406
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................204
False Alerts..........................................................208
Switching the System Off and On..................208
System Errors......................................................208
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................207
System Limitations.............................................207
Using the System...............................................204
Cruise Control.................................................82
Principle of Operation.......................................200
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control...............................200
Customer Assistance..................................243
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................10
Service Data Recording.........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps...............................89
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)..........................................90
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................90
Direction Indicators.........................................91
Lane Change...........................................................91
Drive Control.................................................209
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL............................209
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................43
Children and Airbags...........................................44
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.........................................................43
Driving Aids...................................................202
Driving Hints..................................................235
Driving Through Water...............................236
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...........................89
E
Economical Driving......................................235
Emission Control System............................168
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)........................169
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing...............................................................170
End User License Agreement...................385
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ....................................385
Engine Block Heater....................................160
Using the Engine Block Heater........................161
Engine Coolant Check................................269
Adding Engine Coolant.....................................270
Checking the Engine Coolant.........................270
Recycled Engine Coolant..................................271
Severe Climates...................................................271
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling.............................................................272
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.........................73
Engine Oil Check.........................................268
Adding Engine Oil..............................................268
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................268
Engine Specifications..................................328
Drivebelt Routing................................................328
Environment......................................................15
Essential Towing Checks...........................226
Before Towing a Trailer......................................231
Hitches..................................................................227
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)............................................232
Safety Chains......................................................230
Trailer Brakes......................................................230
Trailer Hitch Cover.............................................226
Trailer Lamps.......................................................230
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector).......................................................226
When Towing a Trailer........................................231
407
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options...................................14
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................350
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)..................351
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)............................350
Exterior Mirrors................................................94
Auto-Dimming Feature........................................95
Blind Spot Monitor................................................95
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.................................94
Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................95
Memory Mirrors.....................................................95
Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................94
Power-Folding Mirrors.........................................94
Signal Indicator Mirrors.......................................95
F
Fastening the Seatbelts................................33
Safety Belt Extension Assembly.......................35
Safety Belt Locking Modes.................................34
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy.............33
Floor Mats......................................................236
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals...................................83
Four-Wheel Drive..........................................176
Front Parking Aid..........................................196
Fuel and Refueling........................................162
Fuel Consumption.........................................167
Calculating Fuel Economy................................167
Filling the Tank.....................................................167
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................164
Fuel Filter........................................................276
Fuel Quality.....................................................163
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................163
Fuel Shutoff...................................................239
Fuses...............................................................250
Fuse Specification Chart............................250
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel...........256
Power Distribution Box.....................................250
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............148
Gauges..............................................................99
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................49
Intelligent Access..................................................49
General Maintenance Information...........353
Multi-Point Inspection........................................356
Owner Checks and Services...........................355
Protecting Your Investment.............................353
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?............................353
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................353
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................246
Getting the Services You Need................243
Away From Home...............................................243
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake.............................................185
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................239
HDC
See: Using Hill Descent Control......................193
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.......................279
Head Restraints.............................................132
Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................133
Heated Seats..................................................144
Front Seats............................................................144
Rear Seats.............................................................144
Heated Steering Wheel................................82
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................130
Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................130
Heated Rear Window.........................................130
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................125
Hill Start Assist...............................................185
Switching the System On and Off...................186
Using Hill Start Assist.........................................186
408
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................127
Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................127
General Hints........................................................127
Heating the Interior Quickly..............................127
Recommended Settings for Cooling .............127
Recommended Settings for Heating..............127
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................127
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................184
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............264
I
In California (U.S. Only)...............................244
Information Display Control.........................82
Information Displays.....................................105
General Information............................................105
Information Messages....................................111
AdvanceTrac™ / Traction Control
Messages...........................................................112
Alarm Messages...................................................113
Battery and Charging System Messages.......113
Blind Spot Information System
Messages...........................................................114
Brake System Messages....................................115
Door Messages.....................................................115
Engine Messages.................................................116
Fuel Messages......................................................116
Keys and Intelligent Access Messages..........117
Maintenance Messages......................................118
MyKey™ Messages...............................................119
Off Road Messages............................................120
Park Aid Messages..............................................121
Power Steering Messages.................................121
Remote Start Messages....................................122
Suspension System Messages........................122
Tire Messages......................................................123
Trailer Messages..................................................123
Transmission Messages.....................................124
Installing Child Restraints..............................18
Child Seats...............................................................18
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats....................................................................22
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts ...........................18
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)..............................................21
Using Tether Straps..............................................23
Instrument Cluster..........................................99
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................89
Interior Lamps...................................................91
Front Map Lamps (If equipped)..........................91
Rear Dome and Map Lamps..............................92
Interior Mirror...................................................95
Auto-Dimming Mirror...........................................95
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................240
Connecting the Jumper Cables.......................241
Jump Starting.......................................................241
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................240
Removing the Jumper Cables.........................242
409
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
K
Keyless Entry....................................................70
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD...............................................................70
Unlocking and Locking the Doors.....................71
Keyless Starting.............................................156
Ignition Modes.....................................................156
Keys and Remote Controls...........................49
L
Lighting Control...............................................87
Headlamp Flasher................................................88
High Beams............................................................88
Lighting..............................................................87
General Information..............................................87
Limited Slip Differential................................183
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services.......11
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers................213
Load Carrying.................................................212
Load Limit........................................................214
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles.............................................................221
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................214
Locking and Unlocking.................................63
Activating Intelligent Access..............................64
Autolock..................................................................65
Auto Relock............................................................65
Autounlock.............................................................65
Battery Saver.........................................................66
Illuminated Entry...................................................66
Illuminated Exit......................................................66
Power Door Locks................................................63
Remote Control.....................................................63
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys.....................................................................64
Locks..................................................................63
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................320
M
Maintenance..................................................264
General Information...........................................264
Media Hub......................................................347
Memory Function..........................................135
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................137
Saving a PreSet Position...................................136
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................105
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors.................130
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................93
Mobile Communications Equipment...........13
Moonroof...........................................................97
Bounce-Back..........................................................98
Opening and Closing the Moonroof................97
Venting the Moonroof.........................................98
Motorcraft Parts............................................329
MyKey Troubleshooting................................60
MyKey™..............................................................54
Principle of Operation..........................................54
N
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..............357
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor................................357
Normal Maintenance Intervals........................359
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................269
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................268
Opening and Closing the Hood...............264
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................248
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual............248
410
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Overhead Console.......................................155
P
Parking Aids....................................................195
Principle of Operation........................................195
Parking Brake.................................................185
Passive Anti-Theft System............................73
SecuriLock™............................................................73
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.........................73
Pedals................................................................83
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..............................63
Power Liftgate.................................................66
Obstacle Detection..............................................69
Opening and Closing the Liftgate....................67
Stopping the Liftgate Movement......................69
Power Running Boards..................................75
Power Seats....................................................134
Power Lumbar......................................................135
Power Recline......................................................135
Power Windows..............................................93
Accessory Delay...................................................94
Bounce-Back..........................................................93
One-Touch Down..................................................93
One-Touch Up.......................................................93
Window Lock..........................................................93
Protecting the Environment..........................15
R
Rear Axle.........................................................183
Rear Parking Aid............................................196
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............129
Rear Quarter Windows..................................96
Rear Seats.......................................................137
Adjusting the Second Row Center 20%
Seat....................................................................142
Adjusting the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seat for E-Z Entry............................................139
Exiting the Third Row..........................................141
Folding Down the Second Row 40% Seat
.............................................................................137
Folding the Second Row Center 20% Seat
..............................................................................141
Placing the Second Row Outboard 40% Seats
in Cargo Mode.................................................138
PowerFold™ Third Row Seat.............................142
Reclining the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seatback............................................................141
Returning to the Upright Position from the Full
Lowered Load Floor Position.......................139
Rear Under Floor Storage...........................212
Cargo Management System.............................212
Cargo Shelf and Divider....................................212
Rear View Camera........................................197
Using the Rear View Camera System............197
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera.....................................197
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............85
Rear Window Washer..........................................86
Rear Window Wiper.............................................85
Recommended Towing Weights..............223
411
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Reduced Engine Performance..................235
Refueling.........................................................165
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System.....................166
Remote Control...............................................50
Car Finder................................................................51
Intelligent Access Key.........................................50
Memory Feature....................................................53
Remote Start...........................................................51
Replacing the Battery..........................................50
Sounding the Panic Alarm...................................51
Remote Start...................................................130
Automatic Settings...............................................131
Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................292
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts........................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................53
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................249
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......248
Roadside Assistance...................................238
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................239
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................239
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance.....................................238
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance.....................................238
Roadside Emergencies...............................238
Roof Racks and Load Carriers...................213
Adjusting the Crossbar......................................213
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................235
Running Out of Fuel.....................................164
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................164
Filling a Portable Fuel Container.....................164
S
Safety Canopy™...............................................45
Safety Precautions........................................162
Satellite Radio...............................................344
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)..................................................................346
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..................345
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service......................345
Troubleshooting..................................................346
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............365
Scheduled Maintenance............................353
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................35
Second Row Comfort Guide..............................36
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................38
Belt-Minder™...........................................................38
Seatbelts...........................................................32
Principle of Operation..........................................32
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................37
Conditions of operation.......................................37
Seats.................................................................132
Security..............................................................73
Self-Leveling Suspension.............................211
Side Airbags.....................................................44
Sitting in the Correct Position....................132
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains...................................312
Special Notices.................................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...........................13
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...........................13
Special Instructions...............................................13
412
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance................................................361
Exceptions............................................................363
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................200
Stability Control.............................................189
Principle of Operation........................................189
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................157
Automatic Engine Shutdown............................159
Failure to Start......................................................158
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes..................160
Important Ventilating Information...................160
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................159
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................159
Starting and Stopping the Engine.............156
General Information............................................156
Steering..........................................................208
Electric Power Steering....................................208
Steering Wheel................................................77
Storage Compartments...............................155
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.......................................................97
Sun Visors.........................................................96
Illuminated Vanity Mirror.....................................97
Supplementary Restraints System..............41
Principle of Operation...........................................41
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
T
Tailgate
See: Power Liftgate..............................................66
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications...............328
Terrain Response...........................................193
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)..........................245
Tire Care.........................................................298
Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................299
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................298
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................300
Temperature A B C............................................299
Traction AA A B C..............................................299
Treadwear............................................................299
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..............313
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System..........................................314
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System ..............................................................315
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................295
Towing a Trailer.............................................222
Load Placement..................................................222
Towing Points................................................232
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........234
Emergency Towing............................................234
Towing.............................................................222
Traction Control.............................................187
Principle of Operation........................................187
Trailer Sway Control....................................223
Transfer Case Fluid Check.........................274
Transmission Code Designation................331
Transmission....................................................171
Transmission
See: Transmission.................................................171
Transporting the Vehicle............................233
U
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™....................................................266
Universal Garage Door Opener................148
HomeLink Wireless Control System...............148
Using Cruise Control...................................200
Switching Cruise Control Off............................201
Switching Cruise Control On and Off...........200
413
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Using Four-Wheel Drive..............................176
4WD Indicator Lights..........................................176
4WD Switch Positions.........................................176
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles.............................................................178
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles.............................................................178
Using Hill Descent Control.........................193
Principle of Operation........................................193
Using Hill Descent Control...............................193
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................59
Vehicles With Ford-Approved Aftermarket
Remote Start Systems.....................................59
Vehicles With Non-Ford-Approved
Aftermarket Remote Start Systems.............59
Using Power Running Boards......................75
Automatic Power Deploy....................................75
Automatic Power Stow........................................75
Bounce-back..........................................................76
Enabling and Disabling........................................75
Manual Power Deploy.........................................75
Using Snow Chains.......................................312
Using Stability Control.................................190
Stability Control and Traction Control with Roll
Stability Control™ (RSC™)...............................190
Using Traction Control.................................187
Switching the System Off .................................187
System Indicator Lights and Messages.........188
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).............................................246
V
Vehicle Care..................................................286
General Information...........................................286
Vehicle Certification Label.........................330
Vehicle Identification Number..................330
Vehicle Storage............................................293
Battery...................................................................294
Body.......................................................................293
Brakes...................................................................294
Cooling system...................................................294
Engine...................................................................293
Fuel system..........................................................293
General.................................................................293
Miscellaneous.....................................................294
Removing Vehicle From Storage...................294
Tires.......................................................................294
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................125
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...............330
Voice Control....................................................81
Type One.................................................................81
Type Two.................................................................82
414
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators...................101
4X2..........................................................................104
4X4 Auto................................................................104
4X4 HIGH..............................................................104
Anti-Lock Braking System..................................101
Battery.....................................................................101
Brake System........................................................101
Cruise Control.......................................................101
Direction Indicator................................................101
Door Ajar...............................................................102
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................102
Engine Oil..............................................................102
Fasten Safety Belt...............................................102
Front Airbag..........................................................102
High Beam............................................................102
Hill Descent..........................................................102
Liftgate Ajar..........................................................102
Low Fuel Level.....................................................102
Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................102
Low Washer Fluid................................................103
Parking Lamps......................................................103
Powertrain Fault...................................................103
Service Engine Soon..........................................103
Stability Control System....................................103
Stability Control System Off..............................103
Transmission Tow/Haul......................................104
Washer Fluid Check.....................................275
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................286
See: Wipers and Washers...................................84
Waxing.............................................................287
Welcome Lighting............................................91
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................320
Wheels and Tires.........................................295
General Information...........................................295
Technical Specifications...................................326
Windows and Mirrors.....................................93
Windshield Washers......................................85
Windshield Wipers..........................................84
Speed Dependent Wipers..................................84
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades...................278
Wipers and Washers......................................84
Wrecker Towing
See: Transporting the Vehicle.........................233
415
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
416
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
